JP6720059B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot.

Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on their respective surfaces, and game medals, coins, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "medals, etc.") are inserted, and it is detected that the player has operated the start lever. Detecting that a start switch requesting the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are pressed by the player, and requesting a stop of rotation of the corresponding reel A stop switch that outputs a signal to output each of the plurality of reels, and a stepping motor that transmits each driving force to each reel, and stepping based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. The reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor, rotates the reels, and stops the reels is provided, and when it detects that the start lever is operated, the lottery is performed based on the random number value. , "Internal winning combination") and a so-called pachi-slot machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected.

Some conventional gaming machines of this type perform lottery (addition lottery) for extending a period (the number of games) of a so-called assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”). According to such a gaming machine, the interest of the game can be enhanced by making the AT period indefinite (for example, see Patent Document 1). In addition, in recent years, some games have been made more interesting by providing a plurality of triggers for extending the AT period.

JP, 2005-77293, A

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since a plurality of lottery tables used for additional lottery are different for each of various triggers, the size of data including such a plurality of lottery tables is easily enlarged, and other stored data and processing can be performed. There was a problem that it was easy to press.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of the game while suppressing the data size.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachi-slot machine 1 described later) is
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels,
At the start of the unit game, a winning combination determination means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation for the reel, the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area by stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
An effect state control means capable of shifting a plurality of effect states (for example, a main CPU 93 described later),
Equipped with
The effect state control means,
When a predetermined grant condition is satisfied, it is possible to grant a navigation effect state (for example, ART described later) that assists in winning the internal winning combination.
In the navigation effect state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an addition means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later or the like) that can be added by a predetermined addition lottery (for example, an additional game number lottery or the like) during the period of the navigation effect state. ) Is included,
The adding means is
A plurality of lottery tables used in the predetermined additional lottery (for example, an additional game number lottery table described later) is associated with a plurality of table numbers (for example, tables 1 to 7 described later),
By designating the table number according to the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, the predetermined additional lottery is performed using the corresponding lottery table,
At least one table number of the plurality of table numbers can be designated in a plurality of different addition states in the navigation effect state (for example, normal, high-accuracy, super-high-accuracy, etc. as an additional state described later). ,
The addition means has a plurality of selection tables for randomly selecting one table number from the plurality of table numbers (for example, an additional lottery A table described later, an additional lottery B table, etc.),
The plurality of selection tables include at least a first selection table (for example, an additional lottery A table described later) and a second selection table (for example, an additional lottery B table described later),
The addition means is capable of selecting a specific table number (for example, tables 5 and 6 described later) using the first selection table when a first winning combination (for example, middle-tier cherry described later) is won. said first second role different from the role (for example, below the SP descriptor, WSP descriptor, etc.) Ri selectable der the specific table number using said second selection table when winning a,
The first selection table is characterized in that it is defined to be used by multiplying a defined lottery value in accordance with the plurality of additional states .

According to such a gaming machine, even if different internal winning combinations are determined in different addition states during the navigation effect state, the addition of the lottery can be performed using the same lottery table by designating the same table number. Since it may be performed, it is possible to empirically make it easier to associate the number of additional games to be derived as a lottery result from the same lottery table, which in turn makes it possible to increase expectations and interest in the game, and to increase the lottery results. The required data size of the entire table can also be suppressed.

In a preferred embodiment of the invention,
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels,
At the start of the unit game, a winning combination determination means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation for the reel, the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area by stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
An effect state control means capable of shifting a plurality of effect states (for example, a main CPU 93 described later),
Equipped with
The effect state control means,
When a predetermined grant condition is satisfied, it is possible to grant a navigation effect state (for example, ART described later) that assists in winning the internal winning combination.
In the navigation effect state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an addition means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later or the like) that can be added by a predetermined addition lottery (for example, an additional game number lottery or the like) during the period of the navigation effect state. ) Is included,
The adding means is
A plurality of lottery tables used in the predetermined additional lottery (for example, an additional game number lottery table described later) is associated with a plurality of table numbers (for example, tables 1 to 7 described later),
By designating the table number according to the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, the predetermined additional lottery is performed using the corresponding lottery table,
At least one table number of the plurality of table numbers can be designated in a plurality of different addition states in the navigation effect state (for example, normal, high-accuracy, super-high-accuracy, etc. as an additional state described later). ,
It has a first selection table for randomly selecting one table number from the plurality of table numbers,
The effect state control means,
A special combination (for example, BB1 or the like described later) is determined as the internal winning combination by the winning combination determination means, and a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination during the winning carryover of the special combination (for example, BB inside or the like described below). When is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, it is possible to shift to a special effect state advantageous to the player (for example, a normal BB described later),
In the non-navi production state (for example, CZ or the like described later) that can shift to the navigation production state without assisting the winning of the internal winning combination, when the predetermined grant condition (for example, the ART winning or the like described later) is satisfied. It is possible to add the navigation effect state to,
In the navigation effect state, it is possible to control an additional specializing period (for example, PTR described later) for specially adding the period of the navigation effect state,
The add-on means can select a specific table number (for example, tables 5 and 6 described later) from the plurality of table numbers based on the first selection table in the add-on special period, and the special addition Ri selectable der the specific table number of the plurality of table number in effect state,
The first selection table is characterized in that it is defined to be used by multiplying a defined lottery value in accordance with the plurality of additional states .
Further, in a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The first selection table is
When the added-on state is the first added-on state, the first lottery value corresponding to when the predetermined combination is won is defined,
When the additional state is a second additional state different from the first additional state, it is specified that the first lottery value is doubled when the predetermined combination is won, and the predetermined combination is used. It defines the second lottery value corresponding to the winning of a specific combination different from
When the additional state is a third additional state that is different from the first additional state and the second additional state, it is specified that the second lottery value is doubled and used when the specific combination is won. It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, a plurality of lottery tables are commonly used in the additional lottery in the navigation effect state and the special effect state, and in the additional lottery in the navigation effect state, the first selection table is used. While a specific table number can be selected at the time of winning, in the additional lottery in the special effect state, the same table number is selected using the second selection table even when winning the second combination different from the first combination. Since it is possible, it is possible not to be determined monotonically even by lottery regarding the addition in the period of the navigation effect state. In addition, since the additional lottery is performed using two types of tables such as the lottery table and the selection table, even if the probability denominator for the overall lottery probability using the two tables is set to 65536, the lottery value specified in each table is determined. Can be regulated to be relatively small by limiting the number to 256, and the data size of each table can be effectively suppressed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest of the game while suppressing the data size.

It is a figure which shows the function flow of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is the whole perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine concerning the embodiment of the invention. It is an exploded view of the upper door of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a partially exploded view of the base of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded view of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of the 1st movable part of the accessory device in the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control circuit of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub-control circuit of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game state flow of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the payout state flow of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol arrangement|sequence table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol code table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol combination table (special part) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol combination table (re-game combination) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol combination table (winning combination) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol combination table (winning combination) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol combination table (RT transition eye) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the internal lottery table (setting 1, non-MB inside) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the internal lottery table (setting 1, inside MB) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the priority selection table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the winning combination command navigation number correspondence table of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the navigation correspondence table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the lottery group corresponding table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the payout state lottery classification correspondence table of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the payout state lottery type use random number correspondence table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game lock number correspondence table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [normal] ISM mode transfer lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the ISM mode transfer lottery table (setting 1) after the [normal] setting change of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [normal] ISM acquisition lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [normal] CZ lottery state transfer lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [normal] CZ lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [normal] ART lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [CZ1] CZ classification lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [CZ1] boss lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [CZ14G] final game ART lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [CZ14G] final game revival lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [EXCZ] number-of-games addition lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine concerning the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART1,2,3,4] level-up lottery table (ART1) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining [ART1,2,3,4] level-up lottery table (ART2) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining [ART1,2,3,4] level-up lottery table (ART3) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART1,2,3,4] level-up lottery table (ART4) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART1,2,3,4] level-up lottery table (ART4 (previous ART5)) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART2] loop guarantee frequency lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART4] victory reward lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] addition state transition lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] addition lottery lottery A table (normal) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] addition lottery A table (high accuracy) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] addition lottery A table (ultra high accuracy) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] addition lottery lottery B table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART5] special addition lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] additional game number lottery table (tables 1-7) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] addition special stock lottery A table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] addition specialized stock lottery B table (normal) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] addition specialized stock lottery B table (high accuracy) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] additional specialized stock lottery B table (ultra high accuracy) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [ALL] PTR classification lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [normal, CZ] ART grade lottery table (CZ, direct hit, BB2) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [normal, ART5] precursor game number lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine concerning the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART2,5] loop rate lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART2, 5] loop lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the reel lock lottery table (setting 1) in PTR of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the fixed CZ point distribution lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ music lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ production category lottery table (1G) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ production category lottery table (2-10th eye) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ production category lottery table (11 Gth) of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the competition point doubling lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ enemy character destruction A contents lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ aura acquisition lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ aura content lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ production content lottery (frame hula) table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ effect content random determination (shutter) table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ small window Kell lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ enemy appearance lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ battle technique determination lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ enemy judge lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ push button color lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the EXCZ production category lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the EXCZ aim content lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the EXCZ frame hula content lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the EXCZ final agitation lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the EXCZ navigation type random determination table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the EXCZ pseudo-navi push order lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning the embodiment of the invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the payout state control process of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during normal of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CZ start of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during EXCZ of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of start during ART of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of start during ART of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of start during ART preparation of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows reel stop initialization processing of a pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a flow chart which shows reel stop control processing of a pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a flow chart which shows BB check processing of a pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a flow chart which shows BB check processing of a pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a flowchart which shows the MB check process of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows RT check processing of a pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a flowchart which shows the payout state check process of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the payout state check process of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the payout state check process of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side navigation effect control process of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the relation between the winning combination of the pachi-slot machine and the symbol display mode according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display mode in CZ of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the internal level and effect contents in ART of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention.

<Function flow of pachi-slot machine>
A pachi-slot machine which is a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention will be described. First, referring to FIG. 1, a functional flow according to the embodiment of the gaming machine will be described.

The pachi-slot machine of the present embodiment uses medals as a game medium for playing a unit game (game). As the game medium, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens or the like can be applied in addition to medals.

As a predetermined start condition, when a player inserts a medal and operates a start lever, one value is selected from random numbers within a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) (hereinafter, random number value for internal lottery). ) Is extracted.

The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number for internal lottery, and determines an internal winning combination. The internal lottery means is handled by the main control circuit described later. By the determination of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed along the winning determination line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning", in which benefits such as payout of medals, operation of re-game, operation of bonus, etc. are given to the player, and "transition of game state and payout state described later. ", and those related to other so-called "losses" are provided. The internal winning combination that can be determined and the bonus will be given at the time of winning is a small winning combination (bell, watermelon, cherry), a re-playing combination (replay) related to the replay operation, and a bonus operation. There is such a special role (BB, MB). The combination of symbols displayed during the transition of the game state or the payout state other than the combination is called the transition eye or the spilled eye. When a winning combination other than a loser is decided as an internal winning combination, it is also called an internal winning. "Prize" means that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is displayed or established, but that the combination of symbols relating to the transitional or spilled eye is displayed along the winning determination line means "winning". Without saying, the display is simply established or established.

Further, when the start lever is operated, the plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. To do.

In the pachi-slot machine, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the “number of sliding pieces”. If the specified time is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set to 4 symbols, and if the specified time is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set to 1 frame.

The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination permitting the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the combination of the symbols is usually within the specified time of 190 msec (4 symbols), and the winning combination is the winning determination line. Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed along with as much as possible. Further, the reel stop control means defines, for example, one or more reels at the time of the operation of the challenge bonus (CB) and the middle bonus (MB) of continuously operating the second type special accessory. Within 75 msec (one frame of the symbol), the rotation of the reel is stopped so that the symbol combination is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line. Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various prescribed times corresponding to the gaming state to rotate the reels so that a combination of symbols which is not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the winning determination line. Stop.

In this way, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning or transfer. The winning determination means is carried out by the main control circuit described later. When it is determined by the prize determination means that the game is related to winning or transfer, a privilege such as payout of medals is given, or a game state or a payout state is changed. In the pachi-slot machine, the above-described series of flows is performed as one game. Such internal lottery means, reel stop control means and winning determination means are carried by a main control circuit as a symbol variation start means, a winning combination determination means, a stop control means and a game state control means which will be described later.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine, in the above-described series of flow, image display performed by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, driving of accessory devices, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, Alternatively, various effects are performed by utilizing these combinations. As the effect, there is a case where a so-called push order instruction (navi effect) for instructing the push order of the stop operation on the reel is performed.

When the start lever is operated, a random number value for production (hereinafter, a random number value for production) is extracted in addition to the random number value for internal lottery used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means randomly determines, from among a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination and the like, the effect content to be executed this time.

When the effect contents are determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in association with each trigger such as the start of reel rotation, the stop of rotation of each reel, and the determination of whether or not there is a winning (display establishment). .. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine, the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed for) is executed by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is provided to the player and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, the so-called ball output rate can be indirectly changed by controlling the navigation effect such as the push order instruction to be executed or not executed. The main control circuit as the production state control means described later bears the effect content determination means relating to such a payout rate, and the sub-control circuit as the production control means described later takes the effect execution means.

<Structure of pachi-slot machine>
Next, the external structure of the pachi-slot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is an overall perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a serving as a housing that houses reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door 2b serving as a frame body that is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a. Handles 2c are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one handle 2c is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 2c is a recess that is used when carrying the pachi-slot machine 1.

Inside the cabinet 2a, a plurality (three in this embodiment) of reels 3L, 3C, 3R in which a plurality (for example, 21 pieces) of symbols are displayed at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction are housed. ing.

Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are referred to as the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. The above-mentioned plural (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the above-mentioned sheet material.

The front door 2b includes an upper door 9a, a lower door 9b, and a liquid crystal display device 11 which is attached to the upper door 9a and serves as an image display unit for displaying an image. The front door 2b is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the cabinet 2a when the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front of the pachi-slot machine 1.

FIG. 3 is an exploded view of the upper door of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. The upper door 9a is made of a synthetic resin material, and is integrally molded with the front panel 5 arranged on the front surface facing the player (the front surface of the pachi-slot machine 1 and the surface facing the player) 9a- 1 and a cover 9a-2 arranged on the back surface (the surface opposite to the front surface) of the base 9a-1. The accessory device 8 is provided between the base 9a-1 and the cover 9a-2. Are arranged.

FIG. 4 is a partial exploded view of the base of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. The base 9a-1 is provided on the back side of the front panel 5 with components that are energized and operated (for example, an LED substrate on which LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) are arranged). The front panel 5 has fixed decorative portions 5a, 5b, 5c formed on the front surface so as to project to different positions. LED boards 72 (72a, 72b, 72c) are arranged on the back sides of the fixed decorative portions 5a, 5b, 5c, respectively. The LED boards 72a, 72b, 72c are arranged at positions close to the fixed decorative portions 5a, 5b, 5c, respectively, and are arranged at different positions in the front and back directions.

Further, the base 9a-1 has therein a metal piece 73 for grounding the LED boards 72a, 72b, 72c. The metal piece 73 is formed of a plate-like body extending in the direction in which the LED boards 72a, 72b, 72c are arranged (for example, a horizontal direction), and is a member (for example, a metal screw or the like) formed of an electrically conductive material. Is connected to the LED boards 72a, 72b, 72c via.

The metal piece 73 includes an earth 73a which is an example of a connecting portion arranged and connected in the vicinity of the LED substrate 72a, and an earth 73b which is an example of a connecting portion arranged and connected in the vicinity of the LED substrate 72b. , An earth 73c, which is an example of a connecting portion arranged and connected in the vicinity of the LED board 72c, a connecting portion 73e formed of a conductive material by connecting the earth 73a and the earth 73c to the earth 73b, respectively. 73a and a ground 73c, respectively, and a terminal portion 73d for flowing electricity flowing through the metal piece 73 to the outside.

In this embodiment, the fixed decorative portion 5b is arranged on the front side more than the fixed decorative portions 5a and 5c. Therefore, the LED board 72b is arranged on the front side more than the LED boards 72a and 72c. Further, the metal piece 73 has a ground 73b projecting to the front side from the grounds 73a and 73c. Such a ground 73b is an example of a protrusion, and the metal piece 73 is an example of a metal piece that is connected to a plurality of components and has a protrusion that protrudes in the front direction according to the position where the components are arranged. is there.

Further, the ground 73b is arranged substantially in the center of the metal piece 73, has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed by bending a plate-shaped body in a substantially U shape with the back side open when viewed from the top. It is fitted into a rectangular hole formed on the back side of the panel 5. In this way, by fixing the metal piece 73 to the front panel 5, it is possible to prevent the screw or the like from loosening due to vibration or the like, and the metal piece 73 from being displaced in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, or the left and right end portions being rotated. it can.

Returning to FIG. 3, the cover 9a-2 is arranged on the back side of the base 9a-1, and the LED boards 72a, 72b, 72c (see FIG. 4) and the like arranged on the back side of the front panel 5 are energized. It covers the operating parts and the metal piece 73 (see FIG. 4) that grounds the LED boards 72a, 72b, 72c and the like. A control board such as a sub-control board 42 (see FIG. 9) described later is housed and attached to the cover 9a-2 in a protective case.

<Accessory device>
Next, the accessory device 8 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded view of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. The alternate long and short dash line shown in FIG. 5 is a line showing members that engage or contact with each other. In the following description, the left is the left when viewed from the front (front) side of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the right is the right when viewed from the front (front) side of the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, in FIG. 5, only the outer shape of the decorative portion is shown by a dotted line for easy understanding.

The accessory device 8, which is an example of a movable accessory, includes decorative portions (lower middle decorative portion 861, lower left decorative portion 862, lower right decorative portion 863, upper middle decorative portion 864, upper left decorative portion 865, and upper right decorative portion. 866), a movable portion 82, a non-movable portion 81 that movably supports the movable portion 82 in a predetermined direction (for example, a vertical direction and a horizontal direction) extending parallel to a plane facing the player, and a movable portion. And a drive unit 83 for moving the unit 82.

The non-movable part 81 is arranged on one side (for example, right side) on the plane facing the player and on the other side (for example, left side) on the plane facing the player. A second base 812, a connection base 813 arranged between the first base 811 and the second base 812, one end of which is connected to the first base 811 and the other end of which is connected to the second base 812; And a central base 814 disposed on the front side of the.

The first base 811 extends in a direction (e.g., a vertical direction) orthogonal to a direction in which the connection base 813 extends (e.g., a horizontal direction), and extends in the orthogonal direction. A first guide 811a, a second guide 811b, and a third guide. 811c. Each of the first guide 811a, the second guide 811b, and the third guide 811c has a groove that penetrates in the front and rear direction and an engaging member that slidably engages with this groove. The first guide 811a and the second guide 811b are arranged on the same line in the orthogonal direction. The third guide 811c is arranged in parallel with the first guide 811a and the second guide 811b in the direction in which the connection base 813 extends. The first rectangular portion 821 of the first movable portion 820 in the movable portion 82 described later is engaged with the engaging members of the first guide 811a, the second guide 811b, and the third guide 811c. Further, the first base 811 is provided with a first drive unit 870 of a drive unit 83 described later and a stopper 815 described later.

The second base 812 extends in a direction (eg, a vertical direction) orthogonal to a direction in which the connection base 813 extends (eg, a horizontal direction). The second base 812 has a contact surface 812a that extends in the orthogonal direction and faces the back surface, and is in contact with a roller 825 of the first movable portion 820 of the movable portion 82, which will be described later. The second base 812 as described above is an example of a member extending in the vertical direction.

The connection base 813 is arranged in a direction (for example, a vertical direction) orthogonal to a direction in which the connection base 813 extends at a substantially center, with a left guide 813a and a right guide 813b extending in a direction in which the connection base 813 extends (for example, a horizontal direction). A gear 813c, a first engaging portion 813d, and a second engaging portion 813e.

The left guide 813a and the right guide 813b are provided as a pair, respectively. The pair of left guides 813a and the pair of right guides 813b are arranged in a direction (for example, a vertical direction) orthogonal to the direction in which the connecting base 813 extends and extend in parallel with each other. An engaging member that slidably engages. The gear 813c is arranged between the first engaging portion 813d and the second engaging portion 813e. The second movable portion 830 of the movable portion 82, which will be described later, engages with the engaging members of the pair of left guides 813a. The third movable portion 840 of the movable portion 82, which will be described later, engages with the engaging members of the pair of right guides 813b. A rack 830b of the second movable portion 830 and a rack 840b of the third movable portion 840 in the movable portion 82, which will be described later, are engaged with the gear 813c. The first engaging portion 813d slidably engages with the groove 830a of the second movable portion 830 in the movable portion 82 described later. The second engagement portion 813e is slidably engaged with a groove 840a of the third movable portion 840 of the movable portion 82 described later. A second drive unit 880 of the drive unit 83, which will be described later, is arranged on the connection base 813.

The central base 814 has a pair of guides 814a arranged in a direction in which the connection base 813 extends (for example, the left-right direction). Each of the pair of guides 814a extends in a direction (for example, a vertical direction) orthogonal to a direction in which the connection base 813 extends, and has a groove penetrating in the front and rear direction and an engaging member slidably engaged with the groove. With. An upper middle support portion 854 described later is engaged with the pair of guides 814a.

The movable portion 82 includes a first movable portion 820 that is movable in a direction (for example, a vertical direction that is an example of a predetermined direction) orthogonal to a direction in which the connection base 813 extends (for example, a left-right direction), and a direction in which the connection base 813 extends. And the second movable portion 830 that is movable to the second movable portion 830 are arranged in parallel with the second movable portion 830 in the extending direction of the connection base 813, and are movable in the opposite direction to the second movable portion 830 in the extending direction of the connection base 813. And a third movable portion 840.

The first movable portion 820 has a first rectangular portion 821 formed in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the connecting base 813 extends (for example, a vertical direction) and an end portion connected to the first rectangular portion, and the connecting base 813. A second rectangular portion 824 extending in the extending direction (for example, the left-right direction). The first movable portion 820 is formed in a substantially T shape by the first rectangular portion 821 and the second rectangular portion 824. In the example shown in FIG. 5, since the first movable portion 820 is arranged so as to be movable in the vertical direction, the first movable portion 820 is formed in a shape in which a substantially T-shape is sideways when viewed from the front side. There is.

The first rectangular portion 821 is engaged with engaging members of the first guide 811a, the second guide 811b, and the third guide 811c of the first base 811 in the non-movable portion 81. That is, the first rectangular portion 821 has two positions, that is, the first guide 811a and the second guide 811b arranged in the moving direction (for example, the vertical direction) of the movable portion 82, and the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the movable portion 82 ( For example, it is movably supported by the non-movable portion 81 at one location of the third guide 811c arranged in parallel with the first guide 811a and the second guide 811b in the left-right direction. The movable portion 82 including the first rectangular portion 821 is movably supported by the non-movable portion 81 at two locations, that is, the first guide 811a and the second guide 811b that are vertically arranged. Due to the weight of the member attached to the portion 82 and the rotating portion 82, it can be prevented from rotating to the front side or the back side. In addition, the movable portion 82 is formed in a shape in which a substantially T-shape is laterally viewed from the front side, and has a cantilever structure in which only the first rectangular portion 821 is engaged with the non-movable portion 81, thereby saving space. Is possible. In this case, in the movable portion 82, a rotational force that causes the tip of the second rectangular portion 824 to move downward due to gravity is generated around the first rectangular portion 821. According to the present embodiment, the movable portion 82 including the first rectangular portion 821 includes the first guide 811a and the second guide 811b arranged in the vertical direction, and the first guide 811a and the second guide 811a in the horizontal direction. Since it is movably supported by the non-movable portion 81 at one position of the third guide 811c arranged in parallel with 811b, it is possible to prevent the movable portion 82 from rotating due to the rotational force.

FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the first movable portion of the accessory device in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 6, the first movable portion 820 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 6(a), goes through the state shown in FIG. 6(b), and then becomes the state shown in FIG. 6(c) and stops. .. As shown in FIG. 6A, the first rectangular portion 821 of the first movable portion 820 includes a rack portion 822 extending in a direction in which the first rectangular portion 821 extends (for example, a vertical direction) and a first rectangular portion 821. A plurality of protrusions 823 arranged in the extending direction (for example, the vertical direction).

The plurality of protrusions 823 are the uppermost positions in the vertical movement range of the first movable portion 820, and the first protrusion 823A locked by a stopper 815 described later and the vertical movement of the first movable portion 820. A second protrusion 823B that is locked by the stopper 815 at an intermediate position between the uppermost end position and the lowermost end position in the range. The protrusion 823 has a lower surface 823a that abuts an abutting surface 817a of a stopper 815, which will be described later, and one side above the lower surface 823a when the first movable portion 820 is stopped (the state illustrated in FIG. 6C). From the side to the other side, and in the process in which the first movable portion 820 moves upward (state shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B), a side surface that can be slidably contacted with a sliding surface 817b of a stopper 815 described later. 823b.

The first base 811 of the non-movable portion 81 is provided with a stopper 815 that locks the plurality of protrusions 823 to restrict the movement of the first movable portion 820 in the movable portion 82. The stopper 815 is in a locked state (a state shown in FIG. 6C) for locking the protrusion 823 or a non-locked state in which the locked state is released (a state shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B). Can be changed to. The stopper 815 can be moved from the other side to one side or from one side to the other side by a solenoid 816 controlled by a sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) described later, and a plurality of first movable portions 820 can be moved. The engaging portion 817 that abuts the protruding portion 823 and the urging member 818 that urges the engaging portion 817 to the other side.

The locking portion 817 is a contact surface 817a that abuts the lower surface 823a of the protrusion 823 in the locked state (the state shown in FIG. 6C), and descends from one side to the other side below the contact surface 817a. In the process of inclining and moving the first movable portion 820 upward (states shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B ), a sliding contact surface 817b capable of sliding contact with the side surface 823b of the protrusion 823 is provided.

When the movable portion 82 moves downward, the stopper 815 has the solenoid 816 controlled by the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11 ), the locking portion 817 is moved from the other side to the one side, and becomes the non-locking state. After the protrusion 823 of the first movable portion 820 passes through the locking portion 817, the solenoid 816 is controlled by the sub control circuit 101, and the locking portion 817 is moved from one side to the other side to be in the locked state. Further, when the movable portion 82 moves upward, from the state shown in FIG. 6A, the side surface 823b of the protrusion 823 of the first movable portion 820 becomes the sliding contact surface 817b of the locking portion 817 of the stopper 815. Make sliding contact. Then, the locking portion 817 of the stopper 815 is pressed to the other side by the protrusion 823 of the first movable portion 820, the biasing member 818 elastically deforms and contracts, and moves to the other side, as shown in FIG. The state becomes as shown in. That is, the protrusion 823 moves above the locking portion 817 against the biasing force applied to the locking portion 817. Then, when the protrusion 823 of the first movable portion 820 passes through, the locking portion 817 of the stopper 815 is urged by the urging member 818 to move to one side, and the contact surface 817 a of the first movable portion 820. It contacts the lower surface 823a of the protrusion 823 to enter the state shown in FIG. 6C, and regulates the downward movement of the first movable portion 820.

Returning to FIG. 5, the second rectangular portion 824 has a left guide 824a and a right guide 824b that are arranged in a direction in which the second rectangular portion 824 extends (for example, the left-right direction). Each of the left guide 824a and the right guide 824b extends in the direction in which the second rectangular portion 824 extends (for example, the left-right direction), penetrates in the front-back direction, and an engaging member that slidably engages with this groove. With. A lower left support portion 852 described later is engaged with the engaging member of the left guide 824a. A lower right support portion 853 described later is engaged with the engagement member of the right guide 824b.

Further, the second rectangular portion 824 has a roller 825 for guiding the movement of the first movable portion 820 in a predetermined direction (for example, a vertical direction) at the other end opposite to the one end connected to the first rectangular portion 821. It is distributed. The roller 825 has a rotation axis extending in a direction parallel to a plane facing the player and orthogonal to a predetermined direction (for example, a left-right direction), and an outer edge of the roller 825 is the second base of the non-movable portion 81. The contact surface 812a of 812 can be contacted.

The second movable portion 830 engages with the engagement members of the pair of left guides 813a of the connection base 813 in the non-movable portion 81. The second movable portion 830 extends in the direction in which the coupling base 813 extends and in the direction of the third movable portion 840 (for example, rightward), and the first engaging portion 813d of the coupling base 813 slidably engages with the second movable portion 830. A groove 830a, a rack 830b arranged below the groove 830a, which engages with the gear 813c of the connection base 813, and a shaft 830c which extends in the vertical direction and with which an engagement portion 855c of the upper left support portion 855 described later is engaged. , Is provided.

The third movable portion 840 engages with the engagement member of the pair of right guides 813b of the connection base 813 in the non-movable portion 81. The third movable portion 840 extends in the direction in which the connecting base 813 extends and in the direction of the second movable portion 830 (for example, leftward), and the second engaging portion 813e of the connecting base 813 slidably engages with the third movable portion 840. A groove 840a, a rack 840b arranged above the groove 840a and engaged with the gear 813c of the connection base 813, and a shaft 840c extending in the vertical direction and engaged with an engagement portion 856c of an upper right support portion 856 described later. , Is provided.

That is, the gear 813c of the connection base 813 in the non-movable portion 81 is engaged with the rack 830b of the second movable portion 830 and the rack 840b of the third movable portion 840. Accordingly, when the third movable portion 840 moves in a predetermined direction (for example, the left side), the gear 813c that engages with the rack 840b rotates, and this force is transmitted to the rack 830b that engages with the gear 813c, and the second movable portion 840 moves. The part 830 moves in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, the right side).

As described above, in the non-movable portion 81, the two movable portions 82 (the second movable portion 830 and the third movable portion 840) attached so as to be movable in the extending direction of the non-movable portion 81 (the coupling base 813) are respectively engaged. A mating portion (rack 830b, rack 840b) is provided, and these engaging portions are engaged with the rotatable rotary engaging portion (gear 813c) of the non-movable portion 81. As a result, if only one movable portion 82 is moved, the other movable portion 82 can be moved in conjunction with this. Therefore, since it is sufficient to provide a drive unit for moving one movable unit, it is possible to save space as compared with a case where a drive unit for moving each of the two movable units 82 is provided.

The lower middle support portion 851, the lower left support portion 852, and the lower right support portion 853 are connected to the second rectangular portion 824 of the first movable portion 820 of the movable portion 82. As a result, the lower middle support portion 851, the lower left support portion 852, and the lower right support portion 853 move in the same direction as the moving direction of the first movable portion 820 (for example, the vertical direction) as the first movable portion 820 moves. Moving.

The back surface of the lower middle support portion 851 on the lower end side is fixed to a substantially central position of the second rectangular portion 824 of the first movable portion 820. Further, the front surface of the lower middle support portion 851 on the upper end side is engaged with a guide 854a of the upper middle support portion 854 described later. A lower middle decorative portion 861 described later is attached to the front surface of the lower middle supporting portion 851.

The back surface of the lower left support portion 852 on the lower end side is engaged with the engaging member of the left guide 824a of the second rectangular portion 824 of the first movable portion 820. Further, the front surface of the lower left support portion 852 on the upper end side is engaged with a first guide 855a of an upper left support portion 855 described later. A lower left decorative portion 862 described later is attached to the front surface of the lower left support portion 852.

The back surface of the lower right support portion 853 on the lower end side is engaged with the engaging member of the right guide 824b of the second rectangular portion 824 of the first movable portion 820. Further, the front surface of the lower right support portion 853 on the upper end side is engaged with a first guide 856a of an upper right support portion 856 described later. A lower right decorative portion 863, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the lower right support portion 853.

The upper middle support portion 854 has its rear surface on the upper end side engaged with the engaging member of the guide 814a of the central base 814 in the non-movable portion 81, and its upper left side front left end side is the second upper left support portion 855 described later. It is engaged with the engaging member of the guide 855b, and the front right end side on the upper end side thereof is engaged with the engaging member of the second guide 856b of the upper right support portion 856 described later. The upper middle support portion 854 has a pair of guides 854a extending in the moving direction of the first movable portion 820 (for example, the vertical direction). The pair of guides 854a are respectively disposed on the left end side and the right end side of the upper middle support portion 854, extend in the moving direction (for example, the vertical direction) of the movable portion 82, and penetrate into the front and rear directions, and slide on the groove. An engaging member that movably engages. The upper left side of the lower middle support portion 851 is engaged with the engaging member of the left guide 854a. The upper right side of the lower middle support portion 851 is engaged with the engaging member of the right guide 854a. An upper middle decorative portion 864 described later is attached to the front surface of the upper middle supporting portion 854.

As a result, the lower middle support portion 851 overlaps with the upper middle support portion 854 on the back side of the upper middle support portion 854, and along with the movement of the first movable portion 820 of the movable portion 82, together with the upper middle support portion 854. , The center base 814 moves within the range of the length of the groove of the guide 814a. Then, the lower middle support portion 851 further moves within the range of the groove length of the guide 854a of the upper middle support portion 854 along with the movement of the first movable portion 820 of the movable portion 82, and It projects from the back in the moving direction of the first movable portion 820.

The upper left support portion 855 includes a first guide 855a extending in the moving direction of the first movable portion 820 (for example, the vertical direction) and a second guide 855b extending in the moving direction of the second movable portion 830 (for example, the horizontal direction). And an engaging portion 855c provided on the upper end side thereof and slidably engaged with the shaft 830c of the second movable portion 830. The first guide 855a has a groove that extends in the moving direction (for example, the vertical direction) of the first movable portion 820 and that penetrates in the front-back direction, and an engaging member that slidably engages with this groove. The engagement member of the first guide 855a is engaged with the front surface on the upper end side of the lower left support portion 852. The second guide 855b has a groove that extends in the moving direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the second movable portion 830 and penetrates in the front-back direction, and an engaging member that slidably engages with this groove. The engaging member of the second guide 855b is engaged with the upper left side of the upper middle support portion 854 at the front left end side. Accordingly, the upper left support portion 855 moves in the movement direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the second movable portion 830 when the second movable portion 830 moves. Then, the lower left support portion 852 moves in the movement direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the second movable portion 830 when the upper left support portion 855 moves.

The upper right support portion 856 includes a first guide 856a extending in the moving direction of the first movable portion 820 (for example, the vertical direction) and a second guide 856b extending in the moving direction of the third movable portion 840 (for example, the horizontal direction). , An engaging portion 856c provided on the upper end side thereof and slidably engaged with the shaft 840c of the third movable portion 840. The first guide 856a has a groove that extends in the moving direction (for example, the vertical direction) of the first movable portion 820 and penetrates in the front and back directions, and an engaging member that slidably engages with this groove. The engaging member of the first guide 856a is engaged with the front surface on the upper end side of the lower right support portion 853. The second guide 856b has a groove extending in the moving direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the third movable portion 840 and penetrating in the front-back direction, and an engaging member slidably engaged with the groove. The engaging member of the second guide 856b is engaged with the upper right side of the upper middle support portion 854 on the front right end side. Accordingly, the upper right support portion 856 moves in the movement direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the third movable portion 840 when the third movable portion 840 moves. Then, the lower right support portion 853 moves in the moving direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the third movable portion 840 when the upper right support portion 856 moves.

The lower middle decorative portion 861 has a front surface formed in a predetermined shape and a rear surface fixed to the lower middle supporting portion 851. The lower left decorative portion 862 has a front surface formed in a predetermined shape and a rear surface fixed to the lower left support portion 852. The lower right decorative portion 863 has a front surface formed in a predetermined shape and a rear surface fixed to the lower right support portion 853. The upper middle decoration portion 864 has a front surface formed in a predetermined shape and a rear surface fixed to the upper middle support portion 854. The upper left decorative portion 865 has a front surface formed in a predetermined shape and a rear surface fixed to the upper left support portion 855. The upper right decorative portion 866 has a front surface formed in a predetermined shape and a rear surface fixed to the upper right support portion 856.

The lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, the lower right decorative portion 863, the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 are formed in shapes related to each other. The upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 are integrated with each other in the state of being close to or in contact with each other, and form one shape. Further, the lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, and the lower right decorative portion 863 are integrated with each other in a state where they are close to or in contact with each other to form one shape. Further, the lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, the lower right decorative portion 863, the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 may be formed, for example, in a shape showing letters. Good. In this case, the upper middle decoration portion 864, the upper left decoration portion 865, and the upper right decoration portion 866 are formed in a shape showing a character string that represents one meaning, and the lower middle decoration portion 861, the lower left decoration portion 862, and the lower right decoration portion are formed. The part 863 may be formed in a shape showing a character string representing one meaning, and both character strings may have a predetermined meaning.

The drive unit 83 includes a first drive unit 870 that moves the first movable unit 820 and a member attached to the first movable unit 820 in a predetermined direction (for example, a vertical direction), a second movable unit 830, and a second movable unit. A second drive unit 880 that moves a member attached to the unit 830 in a direction orthogonal to a predetermined direction (for example, the left-right direction).

As shown in FIG. 6A, the first driving unit 870 controls the driving force of the first motor 871 and the first motor 871 of the movable unit 82 by the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) described later. A first transmission portion 872 that transmits to the first movable portion 820. The first transmission portion 872 includes a first gear 872a that is rotated by the first motor 871 and a second gear 872b that engages with the first gear 872a and the rack portion 822 of the first movable portion 820. The first movable portion 820 moves upward, for example, by being driven by the first motor 871 under the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11 ), and from the state shown in FIG. The state shown in b) is obtained, and the state shown in FIG. 6C is obtained.

7 and 8 are rear views of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.
In FIG. 7, in the accessory device 8, the lower left supporting portion 852 and the lower right supporting portion 853 are in proximity to or in contact with the lower middle supporting portion 851, and the lower middle supporting portion 851, the lower left supporting portion 852, and the lower right supporting portion 853. Are arranged in an integrated state, the upper left support portion 855 and the upper right support portion 856 come close to or contact the upper middle support portion 854, and the upper middle support portion 854, the upper left support portion 855, and the upper right support portion 856 are It is arranged in an integrated state. 8, in the accessory device 8, the lower left support portion 852 and the lower right support portion 853 are separated from the lower middle support portion 851, and the lower middle support portion 851, the lower left support portion 852, and the lower right support portion 853 are separated. The upper left support portion 855 and the upper right support portion 856 are separated from the upper middle support portion 854, and the upper middle support portion 854, the upper left support portion 855, and the upper right support portion 856 are arranged in a separated state. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 7, the second driving unit 880 transmits the second motor 881 controlled by the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) described below and the driving force of the second motor 881 to the third movable unit 840. And a second transmission unit 882 that does. The second transmission portion 882 has a link member 882a that is rotated by the second motor 881 and an arm member that has one end rotatably connected to the link member 882a and the other end rotatably connected to the third movable portion 840. And 882b. In the accessory device 8, the link member 882a rotates in the arrow direction in FIG. 7 by driving the second motor 881 from the state shown in FIG. 7 under the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11). The arm member 882b is pulled rightward, and the third movable portion 840 is also pulled rightward accordingly. Then, the upper right support portion 856 engaged with the third movable portion 840 and the lower right support portion 853 engaged with the upper right support portion 856 are also pulled in the right direction. Further, when the third movable portion 840 is pulled rightward, the second movable portion 830 is pulled leftward. Then, the upper left support portion 855 engaged with the second movable portion 830 and the lower left support portion 852 engaged with the upper left support portion 855 are also pulled rightward. As a result, the accessory device 8 enters the state shown in FIG.

Returning to FIG. 2, the liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the upper door 9a of the front door 2b so as to display an image related to a game effect and information related to the game in a display area 11a formed on the front side. Has been. The liquid crystal display device 11 can display the game table information such as the customization of the game machine and the game history, in addition to executing the effect by displaying the image. Further, the hall menu is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 according to the operation of the manager of the game arcade. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 11 can be configured with a touch panel, and buttons and the like that can be operated by the administrator can be displayed in the hall menu.

Further, the upper door 9a has a display window 4 through which a part of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R can be visually recognized. The display window 4 is composed of three left display windows 4L corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R.

These display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are provided at positions overlapping the arrangement regions of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and in front of the three reels (player side). ) Is provided. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are arranged consecutively among the plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind them is stopped. The size is set to display one pattern. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R, upper, middle, and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area. Then, in the present embodiment, a line connecting the upper area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower area of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning determination line for determining whether or not to win. That is, in the present embodiment, the winning determination line is set as a so-called downward right crossdown.

A protective glass 6 is arranged on the front side of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the liquid crystal display device 11 described above. As a result, the player cannot directly touch the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, on the front panel 5 of the upper door 9a, a pair of upper specific decorative portions 5d arranged so as to sandwich the fixed decorative portion 5b at the upper portion thereof, and a lower specific decorative portion 5e arranged at substantially the center of the lower portion thereof. , And other decorative members are formed. The LED boards 72 (see FIG. 9) are arranged on the back sides of the pair of upper specific decorative portion 5d and lower specific decorative portion 5e, respectively. The fixed decorative parts 5a, 5b, 5c, the pair of upper specific decorative parts 5d and lower specific decorative parts 5e described above are arranged on the back of each LED 25 of the LED board 72 according to the progress of the game (see FIG. 9). When is turned on, an effect of emitting light is performed.

A pedestal portion 12 is formed at the center of the lower door 9b. The pedestal portion 12 has various devices to be operated by the player (medal slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, selection buttons (push buttons). , Decision button, etc.) are provided.

The medal insertion slot 13 is provided to accept medals that are dropped by the player from the outside onto the pachi-slot machine 1. That is, the medal insertion slot 13 is for the player to insert medals. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are used for one game with a preset number (for example, 3) as an upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1. It is possible (so-called credit function).

The MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 are provided to determine the number of coins to be used for one game from the medals stored inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This settlement button is provided for pulling out (discharging) the medals stored inside the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside.

The start lever 16 is for starting the rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R) according to the operation of the player, and constitutes a start operation means.

The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and are for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels according to the operation of the player. .. These stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R constitute stop operation means.

Further, these stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are adapted to be used when performing an operation regarding information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and for example, when performing a selection operation on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. Used for. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are referred to as the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R, respectively.

The select button and the enter button are used when performing various operations on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 28 including 7-segment LEDs. The 7-segment display 28 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) and the number of medals stored inside the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits) as a privilege. Display digitally. Further, the 7-segment display 28 is an instruction monitor (not shown) for instructing the information of the stop operation necessary for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the winning determination line. ) Is provided. The instruction monitor is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and lights or blinks in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information on the stop operation to be instructed, so that the so-called push order is displayed as the information on the stop operation required for the player. Instruct (notify).

Below the lower door 9b, a medal payout opening 21, a medal tray 22, speakers 23L, 23R, etc. are provided. The medal payout port 21 guides the medals discharged by driving a hopper device 43 described later to the outside. The medal tray 22 stores the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 21. Further, the speakers 23L and 23R output sound effects and music such as music corresponding to the effect contents.

<Electrical structure of pachi-slot machine>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 41 arranged in the cabinet 2a and a sub-control board 42 arranged in the front door 2b. To the main control board 41, a reel relay terminal board 51, a setting key type switch 52, a cabinet side relay board 53, a door relay terminal board 54, and a power supply board 44b of a power supply device 44 are electrically connected. ing.

The reel relay terminal plate 51 is arranged inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 51 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and relays a signal output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motor. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1.

An external centralized terminal board 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are electrically connected to the cabinet-side relay board 53. The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet-side relay board 53.

The external centralized terminal plate 56 is attached to the cabinet 2a, and is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates a medal auxiliary storage not shown. The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage switch is full of medals.

A power switch 44a is connected to the power board 44b of the power supply device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when the pachi-slot machine 1 is supplied with necessary power.

The door relay terminal board 54 has a medal sensor 46, a door opening/closing monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, a selection switch 67, a decision switch 68 and a sub switch. The relay board 69 is connected. That is, the medal sensor 46, the door opening/closing monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, the selection switch 67, the decision switch 68 and the sub relay board 69 are the doors. It is connected to the main control board 41 via a relay terminal board 54.

The medal sensor 46 detects that a medal has passed through a selector (not shown) and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door opening/closing monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening/closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the player has pressed the MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 (see FIG. 2), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

The settlement switch 63 detects that the settlement button (not shown) is pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

The stop switch board 65 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping the reel that is rotating and a circuit for displaying the reel that can be stopped by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 65 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 28 when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable and when replaying. It is a substrate for making. The 7-segment display 28 and the LED 70 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 70 illuminates, for example, a mark indicating the start of a game, a mark for performing a replay, or the like.

The selection switch 67 detects that the selection button has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41 and the sub relay board 69. The decision switch 68 detects that the decision button has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41 and the sub relay board 69.

The sub relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 42 and the main control board 41. In addition, the sub relay board 69 relays wiring that connects the sub control board 42 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub control board 42. That is, the sub control board 42, the sound I/O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 74, and the drive control board 78 are electrically connected to the sub relay board 69.

The sub control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 via a door relay terminal plate 54 and a sub relay board 69. The sub control board 42 is electrically connected to the sound I/O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 74, and the drive control board 78 via the sub relay board 69. ..

The sound I/O board 71 outputs sound to the speakers 23L and 23R. The LED board 72 causes the LED group 25, which is a specific example of the light source, to emit light in accordance with the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) to display a blinking pattern.

The 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 74 stores a history of opening/closing of the front door 2b. Further, the 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101) when the front door 2b is opened.

The drive control board 78 drives the solenoid 816, the first motor 871 and the second motor 881 of the accessory device 8 (see FIG. 5) according to the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11). Let The accessory device 8 is drive-controlled by the drive control board 78 to move in a predetermined direction (for example, the vertical direction) in a decorative portion (lower middle decorative portion 861, lower left decorative portion 862, lower right decorative portion shown in FIG. 5). 863, the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866) are moved. Further, the accessory device 8 is driven and controlled by the drive control board 78 so that a part of the decorative portion (the lower left decorative portion 862 shown in FIG. The right decorative portion 863, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866) are moved.

A ROM cartridge substrate 76 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 77 are connected to the sub control substrate 42. The ROM cartridge board 76 is a board for managing image (video) for production, sound, light (LED group 25), driving of the accessory device 8 (movement of a decorative portion), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay board 77 is a board that relays the wiring that connects the sub-control board 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 configured by the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 10, the main control circuit 91 as the control means has a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 41 as a main component, and has a gaming state and a performance state (hereinafter, also referred to as a “ball-out state”). ) Is to control. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94 and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (command signals) to the sub-control circuit 101 described later, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535, 0 to 255). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers. The random number generator 98 generates, for example, a random number of 0 to 65535 to extract the random number value for internal lottery, and a random number of 0 to 255 to extract the random number value for presentation. As the random number generator, a plurality of random number generators for extracting a random number value for internal lottery and a random number generator for extracting a random number value for presentation may be separately provided.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motor of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one rotation. This reel index is provided, for example, with an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and is provided at a predetermined position of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part are rotated by the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown) having a detection piece interposed therebetween.

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotating one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detector (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, the number of symbols rotated after the reel index is detected is managed. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position at which the reel index is detected.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is basically set to 4 symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle stage of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to four symbols ahead can be stopped in the middle stage of the display window 4. It becomes a design.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 configured by the sub control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 11, the sub-control circuit 101 as the sub-control unit is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and determines or executes the effect contents based on the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. And the like, and controls peripheral devices such as the liquid crystal display device 11, the solenoid 816, the first motor 871, the second motor 881, the LED group 25, and the speakers 23L and 23R shown in FIG. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

The sub CPU 102 responds to a command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 10) in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 to output sound, light, display control of the liquid crystal display device 11, and The drive of the accessory device 8 (see FIG. 5) is controlled. The ROM cartridge board 76 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 10). In addition, in the control program, an effect is produced based on a command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (information such as a game state and a payout state included in the command signal, an internal winning combination and a combination of displayed symbols) ( Production control tasks and the like for controlling video display, accessory operation, lamp lighting, sound output, etc. are included. The effect control task includes a drawing control task that controls the display of images on the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2 ), a drive control task that controls the movement of the decorative portion of the accessory device 8 (see FIG. 5 ), and the LED group 25. (See FIG. 9) A lamp control task for controlling the light output by the light source, a voice control task for controlling the sound output by the speakers 23L, 23R, and the like are included.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, a storage area for storing animation data related to image creation, and the like. Further, a storage area for storing sound data regarding BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data regarding a pattern of turning on/off light, and the like are included.

The sub RAM 103 is a storage area for registering effect data according to the decided effect, a game state and a payout state included in a command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91, an internal winning combination, and a combination of displayed symbols. A storage area is provided for storing various data such as.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including a frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data designated according to the determined effect, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11. Let Further, the sub CPU 102 moves the accessory device 8 (see FIG. 5) decorative portion in accordance with the accessory device movement pattern data designated according to the determined effect.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 23L and 23R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data designated according to the determined effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 25 in accordance with the lamp data designated according to the determined effect.

[Drive control]
The sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11), which is an example of the drive control means, determines the effect based on the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 10), and the role specified according to the effect. The drive of the solenoid 816, the first motor 871 and the second motor 881 of the accessory device 8 is controlled based on the object device movement pattern data. The sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) is a decorative portion (lower middle decorative portion 861, lower left decorative portion 862, lower right decorative portion 863, upper middle decorative portion shown in FIG. 5) in three stages in the accessory device 8. 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866) are moved.

12 to 15 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 12 shows the initial state of the accessory device 8. FIG. 13 shows a state in which the accessory device 8 has moved one step. FIG. 14 shows a state in which the accessory device 8 has moved in two stages. FIG. 15 shows a state in which the accessory device 8 has moved in three stages.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the accessory device 8, in the initial state, the first movable portion 820 is arranged at the uppermost end position, and the second movable portion 830 and the third movable portion 840 are arranged at positions closest to each other. ing. As a result, the lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, and the lower right decorative portion 863 shown in FIG. 5 are arranged close to or in contact with each other in an integrated state, and the upper middle decorative portion 864 and the upper left decorative portion are provided. The decorative portion 865 and the upper right decorative portion 866 are also arranged in close proximity to or in contact with each other in an integrated state. The lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, and the lower right decorative portion 863 in an integrated state are located behind the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 in an integrated state. It is located in. Further, the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 in an integrated state are arranged behind the fixed decorative portion 5b (see FIG. 4). That is, the lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, the lower right decorative portion 863, the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 are in a state invisible to the player in the initial state. It is arranged.

The sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) controls the solenoid 816 to unlock the stopper 815 in the first stage effect of the accessory device 8 based on the accessory device movement pattern data, and the first motor When 871 is driven to move the first movable portion 820 downward, the stopper 815 is locked, and when the second protrusion 823B of the first movable portion 820 contacts the stopper 815, the first motor 871 is stopped. .. Accordingly, the lower middle support portion 851, the lower left support portion 852, the lower right support portion 853, the upper middle support portion 854, the upper left support portion 855, and the upper right support portion 856 shown in FIG. 5 together with the first movable portion 820. , Move down. And the accessory device 8 will be in the state shown in FIG.

16 to 18 are views for explaining the effects of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 16 to 18 are views of the accessory device 8 viewed from the front. FIG. 16 shows a state in which the accessory device 8 has moved one step. FIG. 17 shows a state in which the accessory device 8 has moved in two stages. FIG. 18 shows a state in which the accessory device 8 has moved in three stages. Due to the movement of the accessory device 8 in the first step, the lower middle decorative portion 861 (in the integrated state) is formed behind the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 in the integrated state. (See FIG. 5), the lower left decorative portion 862 (see FIG. 5) and the lower right decorative portion 863 (see FIG. 5) are arranged, and these protrude from the back of the fixed decorative portion 5b to the state shown in FIG. Become. That is, by the movement of the first step, the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 in an integrated state can be visually recognized by the player.

Next, the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) controls the solenoid 816 and the stopper 815 based on the accessory device movement pattern data, as shown in FIG. 14, in the second stage effect of the accessory device 8. Is unlocked, the first motor 871 is driven to move the first movable portion 820 downward, and when the first movable portion 820 moves to the lowermost position, the first motor 871 is stopped. Accordingly, the lower middle support portion 851, the lower left support portion 852, and the lower right support portion 853 illustrated in FIG. 5 together with the first movable portion 820, the upper middle support portion 854, the upper left support portion 855, and the upper right support portion 856. Move below.

As shown in FIG. 17, the accessory device 8 is moved in the second stage so that the lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, and the lower right decorative portion 863 are in an integrated state. The middle decoration portion 864, the upper left decoration portion 865, and the upper right decoration portion 866 project from behind. That is, by the movement of the second stage, the lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, and the lower right decorative portion 863 in an integrated state, the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the integrated state. The upper right decorative portion 866 is visible to the player.

Next, the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) drives the second motor 881 based on the accessory device movement pattern data, as shown in FIG. 15, in the third stage effect of the accessory device 8. , The third movable portion 840 is moved in a direction away from the second movable portion 830. As a result, the second movable portion 830 also moves away from the third movable portion 840, the lower left support portion 852 and the lower right support portion 853 move away from the lower middle support portion 851, and the upper left support portion 855. The upper right support portion 856 moves in a direction away from the upper middle support portion 854.

As shown in FIG. 18, the accessory device 8 moves in a direction in which the lower left decorative portion 862 and the lower right decorative portion 863 are separated from the lower middle decorative portion 861 by the movement of the third step, and the upper left decorative portion 861. 865 and the upper right decorative portion 866 move in a direction away from the upper middle decorative portion 864, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the accessory device 8, a part of the plurality of decorative parts (the upper middle decorative part 864, the upper left decorative part 865, and the upper right decorative part 866) is included in the front panel in the first stage effect. To form an integral shape that is continuous with the shape of a part (fixed decorative portion 5b) of.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, the accessory device 8 is another part of the plurality of decorative parts (lower middle decorative part 861, lower left decorative part 862, and lower right decorative part 863) in the second stage effect. Form an integral shape that is continuous with the above-mentioned part of the plurality of decorative parts (upper middle decorative part 864, upper left decorative part 865, and upper right decorative part 866), and at the same time, the entire plurality of decorative parts are formed of the front panel. An integral shape that is continuous with the shape of part (fixed decorative portion 5b) is formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the accessory device 8 forms an integral shape that is continuous with the shape of a part of the front panel (fixed decorative portion 5b) in the entire plurality of decorative parts in the third stage production. In addition, the shape formed by connecting the opposite sides of the plurality of decorative parts to each other is connected to the shape of a part of the front panel (a pair of the upper specific decorative portion 5d and the lower specific decorative portion 5e), so that A shape (a V shape in the example shown in FIG. 18) is formed. At this time, the pair of upper specific decoration portions 5d and lower specific decoration portion 5e emit light. Also, the lower left decorative portion 862 and the lower right decorative portion 863 move in a direction away from the lower middle decorative portion 861, and the upper left decorative portion 865 and the upper right decorative portion 866 move in a direction away from the upper middle decorative portion 864. Then, from the gap between the lower left decorative portion 862 and the lower right decorative portion 863 and the lower middle decorative portion 861 and the gap between the upper left decorative portion 865 and the upper right decorative portion 866 and the upper middle decorative portion 864, The display area 11a becomes visible to the player, and a predetermined display (for example, the same color as the emission color of the pair of upper specific decoration portion 5d and lower specific decoration portion 5e) is displayed in this display area 11a. As a result, a predetermined shape (a V shape in the example shown in FIG. 18) is formed by the light emission of the pair of upper specific decoration portion 5d and the lower specific decoration portion 5e and the predetermined display in the display area 11a.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, nothing is displayed between the lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, the lower right decorative portion 863, and the lower specific decorative portion 5e, but for example, transparent A liquid crystal display device is provided, and in the display region of this transparent liquid crystal display device, from a predetermined display in the display region 11a visible from the gap between the lower left decorative portion 862, the lower right decorative portion 863, and the lower middle decorative portion 861, You may display the highly transparent image connected to the specific decoration part 5e. Thereby, the light emission of the pair of upper specific decoration portions 5d, the predetermined display in the display area 11a, the image in the display area of the transparent liquid crystal display device and the lower specific decoration portion 5e are integrated into a predetermined shape (for example, a V shape). ) Is possible.

<Pachislot machine game status and payout status>
Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, a game state and a payout state executed in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

<Game state>
The flow of the game state controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG.

As the game state of this embodiment, RT0, RT1, RT2, inside BB (RT3), inside BB1 (RT4), inside BB2 (RT5) are provided. In addition, as a game state that operates in RT0 to RT2, the inside of MB is provided. RT0, RT1 and RT2 are generically referred to as a normal gaming state or a general medium. BB1 (RT4), BB2 (RT5), and MB are collectively referred to as a special game state or bonus. Although there are MB1 and MB2 in MB, they are collectively referred to as MB in FIG. In the BB inside (RT3), BB1 or BB2 is determined as an internal winning combination, and the winning thereof is permitted, and is also referred to as a carry-over state as described later.

Before explaining the gaming state, a combination provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, a winning combination that can be determined as an internal winning combination is a re-gaming winning combination (No. 1 to 15 in non-MB and MB: replay, also referred to as Lip for short), Bell (No. 16-43 in non-MB), watermelon (No. 44, 49 in non-MB), cherry (No. 45, 46, 50, 51 in non-MB: also called Che for short), MB1 (No. 47 in non-MB), MB2 (No. 48 in non-MB), BB1 (Nos. 49 to 51 in non-MB), and BB2 (No. 52 in non-MB) are provided. Replay, bell, watermelon, cherry, MB1, MB2, BB1 and BB2 are collectively called winning combinations. Bells, watermelons, and cherries among the winning roles are the ones that pay out medals when winning the prize, and are collectively called small roles. The bell always wins if you answer correctly in the so-called push order, but you may not win if you do not answer correctly in the push order (also called the push order bell) and there is a common bell that does not matter the push order. Watermelon and cherry are also called rare roles. MB1, MB2, BB1 and BB2 are collectively called a special role. Further, BB1 and BB2 are also referred to as a carryover combination. The replay is provided with a transition role that triggers the transition between RTs. The replay that is a transition role includes a transition role such as an RT2 transition lip that triggers a transition from RT1 to RT2 and a transition role that is an RT0 transition lip that triggers a transition from RT1 and RT2 to RT0. In addition, the display mode of the red symbols “bar 1” and “bar 2” included in the symbol combination when the display is established according to the predetermined stop operation order, which is the group combination WSP lip and the SP lip that triggers the transition to ART described later. Therefore, there is also an ART transition role such as a red bar W and a red bar S described later in which replay can be established). In addition, the replay also has a maintainer that maintains the RT without transitioning between the RTs. The replays that serve as the maintainer include an RT0 middle lip (also called an RT0 normal lip and an RT0 maintenance lip) that maintains RT0, and an RT2 maintenance lip that maintains RT2. As a condition for transition from RT0, RT2 to RT1, there is a so-called bell spill that is satisfied when a so-called batting order bell is missed. The gaming state shifts when these roles are won or when a prize is won, or when a spilled bell is formed. In the MB, all small winning combinations (bell, watermelon, cherry) are determined as internal winning combinations.

Regarding RT0 to RT2, RT0 is a gaming state in which the winning probability (replay winning probability) of the re-play combination is the lowest, RT1 is a gaming state in which the replay winning probability is higher than RT0, and RT2 is a replaying than RT1. A gaming state in which the winning probability is high. RT2 may operate together with AT (assist time), in which case it operates as so-called ART. RT0, RT1, and RT2 are also collectively referred to as “general medium”. If RT0 fails in the batting order (pushing order) of the stop operation to be described later and the bell spill is established, the process proceeds to RT1. In RT1, if the batting order (pushing order) of the stop operation is correct and the RT2 transition lip wins, it shifts to RT2, while if the batting order (pushing order) of the stop operation fails and the RT0 transition lip wins, it shifts to RT0. To do. In RT2, if the batting order (pushing order) of the stop operation fails and the bell spill is established, the process shifts to RT1, while if the batting order (pushing order) of the stop operation fails and the RT0 transition lip wins, the process shifts to RT0. To do.

When BB1 and BB2 are determined as internal winning combinations in the general public such as RT0, RT1 and RT2, the process shifts to inside BB (RT3). In the inside of the BB, BB1 and BB2 are carried over as an internal winning combination, and the symbol combination corresponding to these BB1 and BB2 is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line in accordance with the timing of the stop operation on the reels 3L, 3C and 3R. It is a so-called carry-over state that allows that. Inside the BB, the replay winning probability is almost the same as RT0. In the inside of the BB, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 and BB2 corresponding to the internal winning combination is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line, it becomes the BB winning and BB1 (RT4) and BB2 (RT5) are activated. The operations of BB1 (RT4) and BB2 (RT5) are completed under the condition that, for example, the payout of more than 351 medals is paid out. When the operations of BB1 (RT4) and BB2 (RT5) are completed, the process proceeds to RT0.

When BB1 and BB2 are determined as internal winning combinations, the data corresponding to them are set in the carryover combination storing area of the main RAM 95. The data set in the internal carryover combination storing area is maintained until the corresponding BB1 and BB2 win, and when the corresponding BB1 and BB2 win, the data in the internal carryover combination storing area is cleared. Whether or not BB1 and BB2 are in the carry-over state can be determined depending on whether or not data is set in the carry-over combination storing area. On the other hand, for other re-play combinations, small combinations, MB1 and MB2, when the internal winning combination is determined, the corresponding data is set in the internal winning combination storing area of the main RAM 95, and one game (unit game) is executed. The data in the internal winning combination storing area is cleared each time the processing ends. When a combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination is displayed, the data corresponding to the combination is set in the display winning combination storing area of the main RAM 95, and the data of the displaying combination storing area is set every time one game (unit game) is completed. Cleared.

In addition, in the general public such as RT0, RT1 and RT2, MB1 and MB2 are determined as internal winning combinations, and when the symbol combination corresponding to these MB1 and MB2 is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line, it becomes the MB winning, It becomes MB while keeping RT0-2 at the time of MB winning as it is (without transition to RT). For example, if the player wins an MB during RT0 and becomes an MB, the RT becomes MB in the RT, and when the RT0 in the MB ends, the RT0 in the non-MB returns. The case of MB winning during RT1 and RT2 is the same as the case of MB winning during RT0. Further, during MB1 due to the MB1 winning, the operation is completed under the condition that, for example, the payout of more than 9 medals is paid out. During MB2 due to the MB2 winning, the operation is completed under the condition that, for example, the payout of more than 36 medals is paid out.

<ball-out state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a flow in a payout state controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described.

The payout state of the present embodiment means a state in which the average number of medals acquired in the section is controlled to increase/decrease depending on the section where the navigation monitor is instructed by the instruction monitor and the section where the navigation instruction is not performed. The payout status is roughly classified into a normal status (normal, normal section), a chance zone (CZ, EXCZ, waiting section), ART (advantageous section), a normal BB that operates in conjunction with BB1 and BB2, and a special BB. , ART preparation before moving to ART (advantageous section) is provided. In the following description, a state controlled by the main CPU 93 is particularly referred to as a "ball-out state", and a state controlled by the sub CPU 102 is referred to as a "production state". Basically, the payout state and the production state match, but there are cases where they do not match. This will be described later.

The normal state is a payout state in which a navigation instruction is not given by the instruction monitor, and shifts to CZ or EXCZ based on a winning result of CZ lottery described later. In the normal state, ISM points, which will be described later, are acquired, and the CZ lottery is performed using these ISM points. Further, in the normal state, an ART lottery described later may be performed under a specific condition, and there may be a case of shifting to ART based on the winning result of the ART lottery. Furthermore, in the normal state, effects such as CZ precursor, ART precursor, and non-ART precursor, which will be described later, may be executed. Note that, in the normal state, a navigation instruction may be given by the instruction monitor. In this case, it is preferable that the navigation instruction is issued with a lower probability than in the case of ART described later.

The chance zone is a payout state in which no navigation instruction is given by the instruction monitor, and there are usually CZ (simply referred to as “CZ”) and EXCZ.

The CZ is a payout state in which a navigation instruction for shifting from the normal state during RT0 or RT1 based on the winning result of the CZ lottery is not issued, and continues over a predetermined 14 games (14G). The CZ defeats the enemy character up to the 13th game to obtain a technique point, which will be described later, and an effect is displayed to display a meter according to the accumulated number (acquired number) of the technique point, and the final game (14G (Eyes) produces an effect of defeating the boss character based on a winning result of ART lottery described later, so that the state shifts to ART (ARTLv2) through the ART preparation not shown. In the CZ, the navigation monitor may give a navigation instruction. In this case, it is preferable that the navigation instruction is issued with a lower probability than in the case of ART described later.

EXCZ is a payout state in which a navigation instruction is given to make a transition from the normal state during RT2 based on the winning result of the CZ lottery, and is set in advance except when transitioning to ART according to the winning of an ART transition combination described later. For example, the game continues for at least 10 games (10G). In the EXCZ, when the ART transition combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a cut-in display is performed to suggest that the symbol combination corresponding to the ART transition combination is stopped and displayed by so-called reverse pressing. The EXCZ may continue for 11 games or more based on the winning result of the game number addition lottery described later, and the EXCZ shifts to the ART in accordance with the winning of the ART transition hand before the number of the assigned games is exhausted. Note that in EXCZ, if the SP rep is won as an ART transition hand, the process shifts to ARTLv4 described later, while if the WSP rep is won as the ART transition hand, the process shifts to ARTLv5 via the special preparation and PTR described later. Further, in the EXCZ, the navigation instruction by the instruction monitor may be probabilistically performed by, for example, lottery. In this case, it is preferable that the navigation instruction is issued with a lower probability than in the case of ART described later.

ART is a payout state in which a navigation instruction is given by the instruction monitor, and as an example, ARTLv1, ARTLv2, ARTLv3, ARTLv4, specialized preparations, PTR1 to 3 as additional specialized zones, and the body of ART It is divided into states such as ARTLv5 which is a zone and RUSH which is an additional specialized zone.

ARTLv1, ARTLv2, ARTLv3, and ARTLv4 are in a state in which an effect of promotion/demotion is performed step by step, and 20 games (20G) are assigned as the number of each game, for example. Basically, in ARTLv1, if a winning result is obtained by the level-up lottery described later, it is promoted to ARTLv2 after 20 games have been exhausted, and if a loss result is obtained in the level-up lottery, it is demoted after 20 games have been exhausted. Transition to the state. In ARTLv2, if a winning result is obtained by level-up lottery, the game is promoted to ARTLv3 after 20 games have been exhausted, and if a loss result is obtained by level-up lottery, it is demoted to ARTLv1 after 20 games have been exhausted. In ARTLv3, if a winning result is obtained by level-up lottery, the game is promoted to ARTLv4 after 20 games have been exhausted, and if a loss result is obtained by level-up lottery, it is demoted to ARTLv2 after 20 games have been exhausted. In ARTLv4, if the winning result is obtained by the level-up lottery, it will be promoted after 20 games have been consumed and the special preparations will be made. If the result of loss will be obtained in the level-up lottery, it will be demoted to ARTLv3 after 20 games have been consumed. .. When shifting from CZ (normal CZ) to ART, it shifts to ARTLv2 as an initial shift destination. When migrating from EXCZ to ART, there are a case of migrating to ARTLv4 as an initial migration destination and a case of specialization preparation depending on the winning type of the ART migrating hand. The sub CPU 102 determines the effect contents and executes the effect itself. Further, when migrating from EXCZ to ART, it is desirable to start from a level of ARTLv3 or higher, which is more advantageous than ARTLv2 which is the initial migration destination when migrating from normal CZ to ART. In addition, in ARTLv1, ARTLv2, and ARTLv3, there may be a case where two or more winning results are obtained by the level-up lottery, and in this case, the promotion of two or more from the current level is internally promised. Also, as an exceptional effect in ARTLv1, ARTLv2, ARTLv3, and ARTLv4, there is a case in which an effect that is demoted and then promoted is displayed. Such an effect may be necessarily executed, or may be executed according to a predetermined condition (for example, refer to parameters such as grade described later).

The specialization preparation is a state in which an effect for determining PTR1 to PTR3 of the additional specialization zone described later is performed, and, for example, 3 games (3G) are assigned. When 3 games are consumed in the specialization preparation, one of PTR1 to 3 is performed. PTR1 to 3 are states for determining the initial number of ARTLv5 games. For example, PTR1 is executed for 5 games (5G), PTR2 is executed for 6 games or more (6G ~), and PTR3 is executed for 15 games or more (15G ~). To be done. In PTR1 to PTR3, the number of ARTLv5 games is added according to the winning result of the additional game number lottery described later. PTR1 shifts to ARTLv5 when five games are consumed. When the number of replay wins reaches 5 or more and PTR2 wins the bell, the PTR2 shifts to ARTLv5. When the PTR3 wins the ART transition winning combination within 15 games, the number of games is extended by reallocating 15 games, and when the ART transition winning combination consumes the number of games given without winning, it shifts to ARTLv5.

ARTLv5 is a state in which it continues for the number of games added in PTR1 to 3 or RUSH described later. When ARTLv5 consumes the number of games and ends, the process returns to ARTLv4. When the ARTLv5 has exhausted the number of games, the ART may be terminated and the normal state may be restored. Even in such ARTLv5, there is a possibility that the number of games will be increased according to the winning result of the additional game number lottery. In addition, in ARTLv5, when the winning result is obtained by the additional special stock lottery described later, the process shifts to RUSH. RUSH is a state in which an effect of adding the number of games of ARTLv5 is performed, and for example, the number of games is assigned as a set unit with three games (3G) as one set. In RUSH, the number of ARTLv5 games is added according to the winning result of the additional game lottery. When the number of games for the set is consumed in RUSH, the process shifts to ARTLv5.

The normal BB is a payout state that operates in conjunction with BB1 (RT4), and the special BB is a payout state that operates in conjunction with BB2 (RT5). The normal BB shifts to the normal state or the chance zone (CZ) in response to the end of BB1 (RT4), and when it wins the ART transition hand, it may shift to ARTLv2 or ARTLv5 via ART preparation. .. For example, if you win SP Lip as an ART transition role during normal BB, you move to ARTLv2 via ART preparation after BB1 (RT4) ends, while if you win WSP Lip as an ART transition role during normal BB, BB1 After (RT4), the process shifts to ARTLv5 via ART preparation. When the special BB ends in response to the end of BB2 (RT5), the special BB shifts to the ART preparation. For the normal BB and the special BB, the average number of medals acquired is 240, for example. The normal BB and the special BB as described above operate according to the winning of BB1 or BB2 after passing through the normal state, the chance zone, and the inside of the BB by the winning of BB1 or BB2 during ART. During the ART preparation, when the game state is not staying at RT2 when moving to ART, it is a state of waiting for the start of ART until it shifts to RT2, and when shifting from CZ to ARTLv2, normally BB to ARTLv2 or ARTLv5 It is activated when shifting to (4) or when shifting from special BB to ARTLv5. For example, when transitioning to ART in response to a winning of SP lip after the end of the normal BB, the ART preparation is activated until the transition to RT2, and when the ART preparation is completed (transition to RT2), the control shifts to ARTLv2. Also, when the transition to ART is made in response to the winning of the WSP rip after the end of the normal BB, the ART preparation is activated until the transition to RT2, and when the ART preparation is completed (transition to RT2), the special preparation is performed. Then, it shifts to ARTLv5. After the special BB is completed, the ART preparation is always activated, and when the ART preparation is completed, the process shifts to ARTLv5 via the special preparation. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the shift to the PTR is determined according to the winning of the BB2. Therefore, in the special preparation for transitioning from the special BB via the ART preparation, the RT2 transition lip, which will be described later, does not depend on the three games and the PTR1 to PTR3 from the game next to the game won. Move to either. Further, when the transition from EXCZ to ART is made, RT2 is basically maintained, and therefore the transition is made directly to ART without passing through the preparation for ART.

In addition to the winning conditions by the ART lottery (ART winning), the winning conditions of the ART transferring hand (SP rep, WSP rep), the winning of BB2 (not including the winning of BB1), and the middle of the MB If there is a winning of cherry and the transition condition of ART is satisfied according to the payout state, the process is switched to ART.

<Symbol array table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, an arrangement of symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R will be described.

As shown in FIG. 21, the symbol array table represents the symbol numbers of a plurality of symbols arranged on the peripheral surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol array table shows a correspondence relationship between 21 symbol numbers “0” to “20” and symbols corresponding to these symbol numbers.

The symbol numbers “0” to “20” are used to specify the positions of the symbols along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol numbers “0” to “20” are specified using the values of the reel index and the symbol counter. For example, the main CPU 93 manages how many symbols are rotated by referring to the value of the symbol counter after the reel index is detected, and the position of the symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is It is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected. For example, in the present embodiment, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates in the display window 4 in a direction in which a plurality of symbols moves from top to bottom. As a result, the player visually observes a plurality of symbols passing through the middle of the display window 4 in the order of increasing symbol number (in the order of symbol number “20” after symbol number “20”). You can When the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (the symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) is the symbol number "0", the symbol after the reel index is detected Based on the value of the counter, it is specified whether the symbol with the symbol number larger than the symbol number “0” is located in the middle stage of the display window 4 (is it in transit), and from the symbol with the symbol number located in the middle stage The position of the symbol corresponding to the remaining symbol number is also specified.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning determination line is set to one line as a so-called downward-sloping crossdown, and the symbol combination shown in the symbol combination table described later is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line. Then, a predetermined privilege is granted.

<Design code table>
Next, the symbol code will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 22, the symbol code table shows the correspondence between each symbol and the code arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbols used in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment are, as shown in the figure, "bar 1", "bar 2", "white 7", "B bar", "lip", "bell 1", "bell". There are 10 types: "2", "bell 3", "watermelon", and "cherry". "Bar 1" and "bar 2" are collectively referred to as a red bar or symbol unless otherwise specified. "Bell 1", "Bell 2", and "Bell 3" are collectively referred to as "Bell" unless otherwise specified.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a symbol combination table related to a special combination (BB1, BB2, MB1, MB2), FIG. 24 is a symbol combination table related to a re-game combination (replay), and FIGS. 25 and 26 are small combinations (watermelon, special). The symbol combination table relating to the winning combination, cherry, and bell), and FIG. 27 shows the symbol combination table relating to the transition.

The symbol combination table is used to determine whether the displayed symbol combination corresponds to a winning combination or a transition, and a symbol combination (combination) predetermined according to the type of privilege and a symbol combination. It defines the correspondence between the privilege (the number of medals paid out) when is displayed and the data stored in the main RAM 95 when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed (established). 23 to 27, the data stored in the main RAM 95 is not shown.

In the present embodiment, if the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line matches the symbol combination (combination) defined in the symbol combination table, it is determined that the winning or the transition eye (bell spill) display is established. .. When it is determined that the player has won the prize, the player is provided with benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus game (feature continuous operation device). Further, when it is determined that the display of the bell spilled eye is established as the transition eye, the game state is transited from RT0 or RT2 to RT1. When the symbol combination stopped and displayed along the winning determination line does not match with the symbol combination relating to the special combination, the re-gaming combination, and the small combination defined in the symbol combination table, the so-called "miss" occurs. Even when the symbol combination relating to the spilled bell as the transition eye is displayed, the "miss" occurs. The symbol combination table may be provided with symbol combinations of all "misses", and the "misses" may be specified by directly referring to the symbol combination table.

The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R which is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. In each combination name, a name is defined according to the type and role of the symbols that make up the symbol combination.

The payout number defined in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is stopped and displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 25, when the symbol combination related to the combination name “C_XD watermelon_01” is stopped and displayed, four medals are paid out. In this embodiment, the number of inserted medals (regulated number) required for one game is set to three.

In the present embodiment, as attribute (abbreviation), the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is BB1, BB2, MB1, MB2A, MB2B, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gaming combination is REP1 to 10, and the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination. NML1 to 36, the symbol combination that becomes the RT1 transition trigger (transition eye) is defined as HZR1 to 3. BB1 is also referred to as white BB. BB2 is also referred to as black BB. MB1 is also usually called MB. MB2A and MB2B are also referred to as chance MB1 and chance MB2, respectively. Among REP1 to 10, REP1 is a lip during RT0, REP2 is a RT0 transition lip, REP3 is an RT2 transition lip, REP4 and 5 are RT2 maintenance lip, and REP6 to 10 are collectively referred to as red lip, and REP6. , 8 and 9 are also referred to as red bar S lip, REP7 is referred to as red bar W lip, and REP10 is also referred to as red flapping lip. Of NML1 to 36, NML1 to 3 are also referred to as watermelons, NML4, 5 and 6 are referred to as cherries, and NML7 to 36 are also referred to as bells. In particular, the NMLs 7 to 35 are also referred to as batting order bells, and the NML 36 is also referred to as a common bell. HZR1 to HZR1 are also referred to as bell eyes.

Such attributes are roughly classified into special combinations (BB, MB), re-game combinations (REP), small combinations (NML), and transitions (HZR) for a plurality of symbol combinations, and symbols along the winning determination line. The combination is subdivided for each identifiable group so as to be different depending on the combination and the type of transition eye, and is collectively referred to. For example, "MB1" is an attribute that collectively refers to "C_normal MB_01 to 18", and in each of the two rows of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, each symbol along the winning determination line is an arbitrary "bell 1 to 1". 3” indicates the attribute of the symbol combination in which the symbol corresponding to one row of the right reel 3R is “watermelon” or “cherry”. "REP1" is an attribute that collectively refers to "C_RT0 rep 1_01 to 06", and each symbol corresponding to the two rows of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C is an arbitrary "bell 1 to 3" or "rep". On the other hand, the attribute of the symbol combination in which the symbol corresponding to one row of the right reel 3R is "watermelon" or "cherry" is shown. “REP4” is an attribute that collectively refers to “C_XU Lip_01 to 10”, and each symbol corresponding to the two rows of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C is “white 7” or “watermelon”, “lip”. On the other hand, the symbol corresponding to one row of the right reel 3R indicates the attribute of the symbol combination of "bar 2", "white 7", "bell 1", "bell 3", or "cherry". "REP6" is an attribute that collectively refers to "C_SP red lip_01 to 08", and each symbol corresponding to the two rows of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is "bar 1" or any "bell 1 to 3". ,"Bell 2", the symbol corresponding to one row of the left reel 3L indicates the attribute of the symbol combination that is "bar 1" or "lip". "NML1" is an attribute that collectively refers to "C_XD watermelon_01, 02", and each symbol corresponding to the two rows of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is for the "watermelon" and for the left reel 3L. The attribute of the symbol combination in which the symbol corresponding to one column is “white 7” or “watermelon” is shown. “HZR1” is an attribute that collectively refers to “R_transition eyes 1_01 to 09”, and each symbol corresponding to the two rows of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C is arbitrary “bell 1 to 3” and “cherry”. On the other hand, the attribute of the symbol combination in which the symbol corresponding to one row of the right reel 3R is an arbitrary "bell 1 to 3" is shown. In addition, in the present embodiment, as a result indicating the confirmation of the bonus or the possibility of winning the bonus, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 26, “weak cherry” (only in MB), “strong cherry”, “medium cherry” A symbol combination such as “” can appear. In the case of "middle cherry", the bonus is confirmed, and in the case of "weak cherry" (only in MB) or "strong cherry", the possibility of winning the bonus is suggested. If the stop operation is performed at the timing of stopping the symbol related to the cherry on the left reel 3L in the middle row or the lower row, a symbol combination corresponding to "weak cherry", "strong cherry", or "middle cherry" is displayed. Whether or not the bonus is won can be easily determined depending on whether or not the bonus is won. Furthermore, even if the bonus is not won and a winning other than cherry is won, the game can be advanced as much as possible without missing a small win or the like. The striking method of performing the stop operation aiming at such a cherry pattern is called "DDT".

<Internal lottery table>
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. Note that FIG. 28 shows the internal lottery table referred to in the non-MB in the setting 1, and FIG. 29 shows the internal lottery table referred to in the MB in the setting 1. The internal lottery table is provided differently for each setting depending on whether it is in the MB or not, but for other internal lottery tables other than the one shown in the figure, illustration thereof will be omitted.

The internal lottery table is used when lottery determines an internal winning combination for each game state, and defines the lottery value corresponding to each winning combination. In the present embodiment, the internal lottery table sequentially subtracts random numbers for lottery extracted from a predetermined random number range “0 to 65535” with random numbers according to each winning combination, and the result of the subtraction becomes negative. It is used to determine the internal winning combination by determining whether or not (so-called “carrying” has occurred). That is, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value in the internal lottery table, the higher the probability that the winning combination with the specified lottery value is determined as the internal winning combination. Thus, the winning probability of the winning combination corresponding to each number is represented by “lottery value corresponding to each number/the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)”. Note that, in FIG. 28, the lottery value itself is not defined for the winning combinations (eg, “BB2”) that are not subject to the lottery according to the gaming state (inside the BB, BB1, BB2), and the lottery value column is not specified. Indicates "-".

As shown in FIG. 28, according to the internal lottery table referred to in the non-MB, the type of replay and the winning probability determined as the internal winning combination are changed according to the type of RT. Comparing the lottery values of all the replays in RT0 to 2 in non-MB, it can be seen that the type of the replay and the winning probability determined as the internal winning combination are different in each game state. Focusing only on the replay, in RT0 in non-MB, No. Only “F_RT0 middle rep” of 1 may be determined as an internal winning combination, and in RT1 of non-MB, No. Only “F_RT2 transition rep 1 to 6” of 2 to 7 may be determined as an internal winning combination, and in RT2 of non-MB, No. It is possible that only “F_RT2 Medium Reps 1 to 3”, “F_RT2 Medium WS Reps 1 and 2”, “F_RT2 Medium SS Reps 1 and 2”, and “F_RT2 Medium SF Reps” of 8 to 15 are determined as internal winning combinations. is there.

In RT3 inside the BB, the replay winning probability is substantially equal to RT0, and No. Only “F_RT0 Medium Lip” of 1 may be determined as the internal winning combination, and “BB1” and “F_watermelon”, “F_strong cherry” and “F_middle-tier cherry” are duplicate winning, “BB2”, “ The individual winning of “F_MB1” and “F_MB2” will disappear. Looking at the winning probability of small wins (bell, watermelon, cherry), there is no change in RT0-2 and BB inside (RT3), and in BB1 and BB2, “F_common bell” is the internal win. Since the probability of being determined is dramatically increased, the winning probability of the entire small role becomes high. In addition, since there is no “F_watermelon”, “F_strong cherry” or “F_middle cherry” that overlaps with “BB1” in the inside of the BB, the winning probability of these single winnings is higher than RT0 to 2. The winning probability of watermelon and cherry itself does not change between RT0 to 2 and inside BB.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, in RT0 to 2 in MB, as in RT0 to 2 in non-MB, a predetermined replay is won with a predetermined probability and all the small wins are in predetermined replay. It is supposed to win the duplication. In MB, No. The command indicating the winning combination of 0 to 15 (winning combination command) is No. The winning combinations of 0, 8 to 10 and 14 are "F_weak cherry" commands only in MB, No. The winning combinations of 1 to 7, 11, 12, and 15 are the same winning combinations as “F_strong cherry” in the non-MB, No. It is specified that 13 winning combinations are transmitted as the same winning combination command as “F_middle-tier cherry” in the non-MB (see FIG. 31).

<Priority selection table>
Next, the priority order selection table will be described with reference to FIG.

The priority order selection table represents a result of a stop operation for the reels 3L, 3C, 3R that is established according to the order (stop order) of the stop operation and the internal winning combination. The batting order is batting order 1, which is the operating order of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R, batting order 2, which is the operating order of the left reel 3L, right reel 3R, and middle reel 3C, middle reel 3C, left reel 3L, The batting order 3, which is the operation order of the right reel 3R, the batting order 4, which is the operation order of the middle reel 3C, the right reel 3R, and the left reel 3L, the batting order 5, which is the operation order of the right reel 3R, the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C, the right There is a batting order 6 which is an operation order of the reel 3R, the middle reel 3C, and the left reel 3L. In MB, a predetermined replay and all small wins are won, but priority is given to "F_weak cherry" (MB only, NML6), "F_strong cherry" (NML6), "F_middle-stage". A symbol combination corresponding to "cherry" (NML4, 5) is displayed, and nine medals are paid out as a payout accordingly.

For example, in RT0 in non-MB, No. When the “F_RT0 middle rep” of 1 is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination related to the RT0 middle rep (REP1) is displayed and RT0 is maintained in any of batting orders 1 to 6. On the other hand, in RT1 in non-MB, No. When "F_RT2 transition rip 1" of 2 is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination related to the RT2 transition rep (REP3) is preferentially displayed at the time of batting order 1 to shift to RT2, In the remaining batting orders 2 to 6, the symbol combination related to the RT0 shift rep (REP2) is preferentially displayed, and the shift is made to RT0.

In RT2 in non-MB, No. When "Rip 1 in F_RT2" of 8 is determined as the internal winning combination, RT2 is obtained by preferentially displaying the symbol combination related to RT2 maintenance rep (REP4,5) in batting order 1 or 2. On the other hand, in the remaining batting orders 3 to 6, the symbol combination related to the RT0 shift rep (REP2) is preferentially displayed, and the shift is made to RT0.

In RT2 in non-MB, No. When “WS Rip 1 in F_RT2” (WSP Rip as a group role to be described later) of 11 is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination relating to the RT2 maintenance rep (REP4) has priority in the batting order 1 to 4 While the RT2 is maintained by being displayed, the symbol combinations related to the red bar W (REP7) are preferentially displayed in the remaining batting orders 5 and 6. No. 2 at RT2 in non-MB. If “12 WS Flip in F_RT2” (WSP rip as a group role to be described later) of 12 is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol combination relating to the RT2 maintenance rep (REP4) takes priority in the batting order 1 to 4 While RT2 is maintained by being displayed, the red batting W (REP7) and the symbol combination relating to the red bar S (REP6) are preferentially displayed in the remaining batting orders 5 and 6. When such a WSP lip is won, the transfer of ART is confirmed.

In RT2 in non-MB, No. If “SS Lip 1 in F_RT2” (SP lip as a group role to be described later) of 13 is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol combination relating to the RT2 maintenance lip (REP4) takes priority in the batting order 1 to 4 While the RT2 is maintained by being displayed, the symbol combinations related to the red bar S (REP8, 9) are preferentially displayed in the remaining batting orders 5 and 6. No. 2 at RT2 in non-MB. If “SS Lip 2 in F_RT2” (SP lip as a group role to be described later) of 14 is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol combination relating to the RT2 maintenance lip (REP4) takes priority in the batting order 1 to 4 While the RT2 is maintained by being displayed, the other batting orders 5 and 6 preferentially display the symbol combination related to the red bar S (REP6) in addition to the red bar S (REP8 and 9). .. The transfer of the ART is confirmed even when the SP rip is won in this way.

No. 2 at RT2 in non-MB. If “F_RT2 Medium SF Lip” of 15 is determined as an internal winning combination, RT2 is obtained by preferentially displaying the symbol combination related to RT2 maintenance lip (REP4,5) in batting order 1 to 4. On the other hand, in the remaining batting orders 5 and 6, the symbol combinations related to the red bar fake (red fan lip, REP10) are preferentially displayed. Even if such a red-sharp lip is won, it does not shift to ART.

Further, in the normal time (RT0 to 2) in the non-MB which is not in the BB, for example, No. When "F_Left Bells 1-9" of 16 to 24 are determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination relating to the TL bell (NML7) in which the symbol combinations of the bells are aligned to the so-called top line during batting order 1 and 2 Is displayed preferentially, while the remaining batting order 3 to 6 has a probability of 1/9 that the symbol combination of bells is aligned on the winning determination line (crossdown). The symbol combination related to XD bell (NML10 to 36) is displayed. Then, with a probability of 8/9, the symbol combination relating to the bell-eye drops (HZR1 to 3) is displayed, and the process proceeds to RT1. In the inside of the BB, no. When "F_Left Bells 1-9" of 16 to 24 are determined as the internal winning combination, TL bells (NML7) in which the symbol combinations of bells are aligned on the so-called top line in batting order 1 or 2 or batting order 5 or 6 While the symbol combinations according to are preferentially displayed, the remaining batting orders 3 and 4 have a probability of 1/9 with respect to the XD bells (NML10 to 36) in which the bell symbol combinations are aligned on the winning determination line (crossdown). The symbol combination is displayed, and the symbol combination relating to the bell fold eyes (HZR1 to 3) is displayed with a probability of 8/9, and thus the process proceeds to RT1.

Further, in the normal time (RT0 to 2) in the non-MB which is not in the BB, for example, No. If "F_Medium Bells 1 to 9" of 25 to 33 are determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination relating to the CL bell (NML8) in which the symbol combinations of the bell are aligned with the so-called center line in batting order 3 and 4 Is preferentially displayed, while the remaining batting order 1, 2, 5, 6 has a probability of 1/9 with respect to the XD bells (NML10 to 36) in which the symbol combinations of bells are aligned on the winning determination line (crossdown). The symbol combination is displayed, and the symbol combination relating to the bell fold eyes (HZR1 to 3) is displayed with a probability of 8/9, and thus the process proceeds to RT1. In the inside of the BB, no. If "F_Medium Bells 1 to 9" of 25 to 33 are determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination relating to the CL bell (NML8) in which the symbol combinations of Bell are aligned to the so-called center line in the batting order 1 to 4 is While preferentially displayed, in the remaining batting orders 5 and 6, there is a 1/9 probability that a symbol combination related to XD Bell (NML10 to 36) is displayed in the winning determination line (crossdown). , With a probability of 8/9, the symbol combinations related to the Bell spilled eyes (HZR1 to 3) are displayed.

Further, in the normal time (RT0 to 2) in the non-MB which is not in the BB, for example, No. If "F_Right Bells 1 to 9" of 34 to 42 are determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination relating to the BL bell (NML9) in which the symbol combinations of Bell are aligned on the so-called bottom line during batting order 5 and 6 Is displayed preferentially, while in the remaining batting order 1 to 4, there is a 1/9 probability that the winning symbol determination line (crossdown) has the symbol combination of bells. The symbol combination of XD bells (NML10 to 36) is displayed. Then, with a probability of 8/9, the symbol combination relating to the bell-eye drops (HZR1 to 3) is displayed, and the process proceeds to RT1. In the inside of the BB, no. When "F_Right Bells 1 to 9" of 34 to 42 are determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination relating to the BL bell (NML9) in which the symbol combinations of Bell are aligned on the so-called bottom line in the batting order 3 to 6 is While preferentially displayed, in the remaining batting orders 1 and 2, with a probability of 1/9, the symbol combination relating to the XD bell (NML10 to 36) in which the symbol combination of bells is aligned is displayed on the winning determination line (crossdown). , With the probability of 8/9, the symbol combination related to the bell-eye drops (HZR1 to 3) is displayed, and the process proceeds to RT1.

For example, No. When "F_Common Bell" of 43 is determined as an internal winning combination, 9 of the NML1 to 36 NML7 to 36 bell symbol combinations are preferentially displayed in any of batting orders 1 to 6 Will be paid out. No. When "F_ watermelon" of 44 is determined as the internal winning combination, in any of batting orders 1 to 6, the symbol combination relating to the watermelon of NML1 and 2 is displayed, and the symbol combination relating to the special winning combination of NML3 is displayed. There is a possibility of being displayed, and unless there is any omission of the watermelon on the middle reel 3C, four or one medal is paid out according to the winning of the watermelon or the special role. No. When “F_strong cherry” of 45 is determined as the internal winning combination, 9 medals are paid out by preferentially displaying the symbol combination related to the common cherry of NML6 in any of batting orders 1 to 6. .. No. When “F_Middle Cherry” of 46 is determined as an internal winning combination, 9 pieces are obtained by preferentially displaying the symbol combination related to SP cherry or common cherry of NML 4 to 6 in any of batting orders 1 to 6. Will be paid out.

Also, in the MB, all small wins including SP cherries or common cherries of NML4-6 along with replay are decided as internal winning combinations, but in any of batting order 1-6, symbol combinations relating to cherries of NML4-6 (Weak cherries, strong cherries, and middle cherries) are displayed preferentially, and 9 medals are paid out according to the winning of the cherry.

Depending on whether or not the display of such a symbol combination is established, the game state is changed as follows. That is, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 or BB2 is displayed and established, the game state corresponding to each is BB1 or BB2. The game states BB1 and BB2 are finished when, for example, more than 351 medals are paid out. When the symbol combination corresponding to MB1 is displayed and established, the game state becomes MB1 and MB1 ends when, for example, more than 9 medals are paid out. When the symbol combination corresponding to MB2A or MB2B is established, the game state becomes MB2, and MB2 ends when, for example, more than 36 medals are paid out. When the symbol combination corresponding to REP1 or REP2 is established during RT1 or RT2, the game state shifts to RT0. When a symbol combination corresponding to REP3 is displayed in RT1, the process proceeds to RT2. When the symbol combination corresponding to REP4 or REP5 is displayed in RT2, RT2 is maintained. If the pressing order fails during the batting order bell win during RT0 or RT2, the symbol combination of the bell spills of HZR1 to HZ3 will be established and the process will proceed to RT1.

<Winning command command navigation number correspondence table>
Next, the winning combination command navigation number correspondence table will be described with reference to FIG.

The winning combination command navigation number correspondence table shows the winning combination commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) to the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) according to the winning combination in the non-MB in normal times and in the MB. It represents the correspondence between the information and the navigation number (instruction monitor number) that is transmitted to give a so-called push order instruction (navi instruction) by the instruction monitor of the 7-segment display 28 during ART (non-MB). is there. In the present embodiment, as described above, a combination (for example, a push order bell) having a different combination of symbols to be preferentially displayed according to the order of stop operations (push order) is provided. For example, when instructing the pressing order “1st (perform the first stopping operation on the left reel 3L)”, “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor and the pressing order “2nd (first stopping operation is in progress). "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the pressing order "3rd (first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R)" is instructed. , "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor. Information notification regarding the reel stop operation by such an instruction monitor is called a navigation instruction, and the winning combination command navigation number correspondence table shows a navigation number (instruction monitor number) corresponding to the information notification content of the navigation instruction. The winning combinations in MB (No. 0 to 15 winning combinations) include all small winning combinations, but as described above, depending on the winning combination, a pattern such as weak cherry, strong cherry, or middle-tier cherry The combination is preferentially displayed. Therefore, in MB, No. The winning combinations of 0, 8 to 10 and 14 are treated as "F_weak cherry" (only in MB), and No. The winning combinations 1 to 7, 11, 12, and 15 are treated in the same manner as "F_strong cherry", and No. The winning combination of 13 is treated in the same manner as “F_middle-tier cherry”. The winning combination command in the MB is not associated with the navigation number. The navigation number will be described later with reference to FIG.

For example, in the non-MB in ART, No. When the “F_RT0 middle rip” of 1 is determined as the internal winning combination, “1” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as the information of the winning combination command. At this time, the navigation number is not transmitted from the main CPU 93.

In addition, in the non-MB in ART, No. When “F_RT2 shift rep 1 to 6” of 2 to 7 are determined as the internal winning combination, “2” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as the information of the winning combination command, and the No. The navigation numbers “1 to 6” corresponding to the internal winning combinations 2 to 7 are transmitted.

In addition, in the non-MB in ART, No. When "F_RT2 middle rep 1-3" of 8 to 10 are determined as the internal winning combination, "3" is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as the information of the winning combination command, and the No. The navigation numbers “7 to 9” corresponding to the internal winning combinations of 8 to 10 are transmitted.

In addition, in the non-MB in ART, No. When “WS_Rip 1, 2 during F_RT2”, “SS Rip 1, 2 during F_RT2”, and “FS Lip during F_RT2” of Nos. 11 to 15 are determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 93 notifies the sub CPU 102 of No. “4 to 8” is transmitted as information of the winning combination command corresponding to each of the internal winning combinations 11 to 15. At this time, the navigation number is not transmitted from the main CPU 93.

In addition, in the non-MB in ART, No. When “F_Left Bells 1 to 9” of 16 to 24 are determined as the internal winning combination, “9” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as the information of the winning combination command, and No. The navigation number “7” corresponding to the internal winning combination of 16 to 24 is transmitted. No. When “F_Medium Bells 1 to 9” of 25 to 33 are determined as the internal winning combination, “9” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as the information of the winning combination command, and the No. The navigation number “8” corresponding to the internal winning combination of 25 to 33 is transmitted. No. When “F_right bells 1 to 9” of 34 to 42 are determined as the internal winning combination, “9” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as the information of the winning combination command, and the No. The navigation number “9” corresponding to the internal winning combination of 34 to 42 is transmitted.

In addition, in the non-MB in ART, No. When the internal winning combination of Nos. 43 to 52 is determined, the main CPU 93 sends the No. “10, 11, 13 to 20” is transmitted as the information of the winning combination command corresponding to each of the internal winning combinations 43 to 52. At this time, the navigation number is not transmitted from the main CPU 93.

Further, in MB, No. When “F_weak cherry” of 0, 8 to 10 and 14 is determined as the internal winning combination, “12” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as the information of the winning combination command, and No. When “F_strong cherry” of 1 to 7, 11, 12, and 15 is determined as the internal winning combination, “13” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as the information of the winning combination command, and No. When “F_Middle Cherry” of 13 is determined as the internal winning combination, “14” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as the information of the winning combination command. Also, during MB and non-ART, the winning combination command is transmitted, but the navigation number is not transmitted. As a result, the sub CPU 102 can specify that one of the push order bells has been won based on the winning combination command during non-ART, for example, but cannot specify the correct push order. During ART, it is possible to specify the correct pressing order based on the navigation number. Such ART includes "Preparing for ART". Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is RT0 even during the ART, the navigation number is not transmitted and the navigation instruction is not issued. The information on the navigation number may be included in the information on the winning combination command and transmitted at the same time, or may be transmitted by a command unique to the navigation number, separately from the winning combination command.

<Navi correspondence table>
Next, the navigation correspondence table will be described with reference to FIG.

The navigation correspondence table shows the correspondence between the navigation instruction given on the main side and the notification (push order notification) given on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 32, the main CPU 93 displays the numerical values of “1” to “9” on the instruction monitor to instruct navigation information of the stop operation. The numerical values "1" to "9" uniquely correspond to the navigation numbers described above. “1” to “6” indicate the pressing order for instructing (notifying) the navigation, and “1” indicates “(1)(2)(3) when the pressing order is “left, middle, right”. )” is displayed, and “2” indicates that “(1)(3)(2)” is displayed when the pressing order is “left, right, middle”, and “3” is displayed. Indicates that "(2)(1)(3)" is displayed when the pressing order is "middle, left, right", and "4" indicates that the pressing order is "middle, right, left". In this case, "(2)(3)(1)" is displayed, and "5" indicates "(3)(1)(2)" when the pressing order is "right, left, middle". “6” indicates that “(3)(2)(1)” is displayed when the pressing order is “right, middle, left”. “7” to “9” indicate the pressing order indicating which of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R should be stopped first to be the correct answer, and “7” is the first stop operation. Is performed on the left reel 3L, “8” indicates that the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and “9” indicates that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R. It shows that it is done against.

Here, although the numerical values "1" to "9" designated by the navigation on the main side uniquely correspond to the content of the stop operation to be notified, it is not understood that all players can clearly understand the content of the notification. Not exclusively. That is, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to comprehend the content of the notification just by displaying "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the contents of the stop operation are informed on the sub side as well as the navigation instruction on the main side. Specifically, as shown in the navigation correspondence table, the liquid crystal display device 11 is informed of the stop operation information by the control on the sub side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the left reel 3L on the liquid crystal display device 11 is displayed on the sub side. "1" is displayed in the upper area of, to notify that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when notifying the pressing order "middle, left, right", "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and on the sub side, in the area above the middle reel 3C in the liquid crystal display device 11. “1”, “2” is displayed in the upper area of the left reel 3L, and “3” is displayed in the upper area of the right reel 3R to notify that the pressing order is “middle, left, right”. If the reels are stopped in accordance with such a navigation instruction (push order notification), for example, at RT1, it is possible to avoid the prize for the RT0 transition lip and always win the RT2 transition lip. In addition, when the push order bell is won, it is possible to avoid the establishment of the bell spill and always win the bell.

<Lottery group correspondence table>
Next, the lottery group correspondence table will be described with reference to FIG.

The lottery group correspondence table shall handle one or more winning combinations collectively for each lottery group, and the correspondence relationship between the group combination name of the winning combination and the common number (common No.) indicating its type. It is a representation. The lottery group includes a general-purpose lottery group A and an additional lottery group B. In the lottery group A, “miss” is the common No. Group roles of “0”, “Flip in F_RT0”, “Rip in F_RT2 transition”, “Rip in F_RT2”, and “SF lip in F_RT2” are common No. 0. The group roles “Replay”, “Batting order bell” and “Common bell” of No. 1 are common No. The common winning combination of the group winning combination of “Bell”, “F_Watermelon”, and the double winning combination of “BB1+F_Watermelon” are common winning numbers. The group roles “watermelon” and “F_weak cherry (only in MB)” of the third group have the common No. The common winning numbers of the group winning combination of the group roles “weak cherry”, “F_strong cherry” and the double winning combination of “BB1+F_strong cherry” of No. 4 are common. The common winning combination of the group combination “strong cherry”, the single winning combination of “F_middle-stage cherry” and the overlapping winning combination of “BB1+F_middle-stage cherry”, and “BB2” of the group combination of No. 5 are common numbers. The group roles “middle tier cherry”, “F_MB1”, and “F_MB2” of the group No. 6 have the common No. The group roles “MB”, “SS rep 1 in F_RT2” and “SS rep 2 in F_RT2” of group No. 7 are common No. The group roles “SP Lip”, “WS Lip 1 in F_RT2” and “WS Lip 2 in F_RT2” of group No. 8 are common No. It is stipulated as the group role “WSP Rep” of 9. The lottery group B differs from the lottery group A in “BB1+F_watermelon”, “BB1+F_strong cherry”, “BB1+F_middle cherry”, and “BB2” related to the winning combination, and these winning combinations have common No. It is defined as 10 group roles “BB”. That is, since such lottery groups A and B collect approximately 20 winning combinations into approximately 10 grouping combinations and define various tables to be described later, the data size of the tables is significantly reduced. be able to. In addition, for example, the No. related to the winning combination. 17-20, "BB1+F_watermelon", "BB1+F_strong cherry", "BB1+F_middle tier cherry", and "BB2" have different types (common numbers) of the group roles assigned by the lottery groups A and B, so one lottery. The lottery result can be changed more than in the case where only the group is provided, and thereby the playability can be improved.

<Winning status lottery type correspondence table>
Next, the payout state lottery type correspondence table will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

The payout state lottery type correspondence table defines the type of lottery processing executed according to the payout state. As types of lottery processing, there are [normal] ISM acquisition lottery, [normal] CZ lottery state transition lottery, [normal] CZ lottery, [CZ1-13G] skill point lottery, [CZ14G] final game ART lottery, [CZ14G] final Lottery for Game Recovery, [ART1,2,3,4] Level Lottery, [ART4] Victory Reward Lottery, [ART5] Additional lottery A, [ART5] Additional Number of Games Lottery, [ART5] Additional Specialized Stock Lottery A, [ART5] ALL] PTR type lottery, [Normal, CZ] ART grade lottery, [Normal, ART5] Prelude game number lottery, [ART2,5] loop rate lottery, [ART2,5] loop lottery, [Normal] ART lottery, [CZ1] ] Boss lottery, [EXCZ] number of games lottery, [CZ1] CZ type lottery, reel reel lottery during PTR, [normal] ISM mode transition lottery, [ART5] special addition lottery, [normal] ISM mode transition lottery after setting change , [ART5] additional lottery B, [ART5] additional state transition lottery, [ART5] additional special stock lottery B, and [ART2] loop guarantee count lottery. In addition, the parentheses indicate a payout state or a specific section of a payout state that is internally specified. The presentation state actually presented to the player and the payout state internally specified basically match, but there are cases where they do not match. For example, [CZ1-13G] is a section in the payout state that is specified as the CZ1 to 13th games in the effect state, and in this case, the effect state and the payout state match. On the other hand, for example, [ART1, 2, 3, 4] is a payout state that is basically identified as ARTLv1 to 4 in the effect state, but for example, even when the payout state is [ART4], the effect state at the present time is Is sometimes referred to as ARTLv3, and in this case, the effect state and the payout state do not match. In addition, [ART5] in the payout state corresponds to ARTLv5, specialization preparation, PTR1 to 3 and RUSH as the effect state.

<Random number used random correspondence table for payout status>
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a payout state lottery type use random number correspondence table will be described.

The payout state lottery type use random number correspondence table shows set numbers of random numbers used in each lottery process shown in FIG. 34. As a set of random numbers, eight sets of set numbers 0 to 7 are provided. The random numbers with set numbers 0 to 3 are 16-bit random numbers in the random number range 0 to 65535, and the random numbers with set numbers 4 to 7 are 8-bit random numbers in the random number range 0 to 255. These random numbers are latched (stored) at the time of input from the start switch 64 (see FIG. 9) (the time of operating the start lever 16 (see FIG. 2)), which is the timing at which the corresponding lottery process is executed. The random numbers of the set numbers 0 to 3 are mainly used in the lottery related to the game state (for example, the lottery of the internal winning combination), but may be used also in the lottery in the payout state. For example, in the [normal] ISM acquisition lottery, a 16-bit random number with a set number of 0 is used, but the lottery is executed by using the lower 8-bit random number range 0 to 255 of this 16-bit random number.

<Game lock number correspondence table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a game lock number correspondence table will be described.

The game lock number correspondence table represents a so-called game lock in which even if the player operates the start lever 16, the operation is internally invalidated or delayed until a predetermined time elapses. The game lock is also called freeze or reel lock. The game lock number correspondence table is No. It defines the lock time and the generation condition for the game locks 1 to 12.

According to the game lock number correspondence table, No. 1 and No. The game lock of No. 2 occurs with a very short lock time of about 2 ms at the start of BB1 (normal BB) and at the start of BB2 (special BB). No. 3 and No. The game lock of No. 4 occurs with a lock time of about 2 seconds at the end of BB1 (normal BB) and at the end of BB2 (special BB). No. The game lock of No. 5 is called BB2 freeze 1, and the lock time is internally generated with about 71 s at the time of winning BB2 other than ART5. However, No. The game lock of No. 5 occurs even if it is during ART5, if BB2 is won during the ART preparation. No. The game lock of 6 is called BB2 freeze 2, and the lock time is generated with about 72 s when BB2 is won internally except in ART 5 and during ART preparation. No. The game lock of No. 7 occurs with a lock time of about 6 s when EXCZ is activated while staying at RT2. No. The game lock of 8 has a lock time of about 4 seconds when RUSH is activated. No. The game lock of No. 9 occurs with a lock time of about 13 seconds at the start of the next game at the time of winning in the [CZ14] final game revival lottery. No. The game lock of 10 is called reel lock 1 in ART 5, and when [ART 5] additional lottery is won, the lock time occurs with about 35 s when it is won in the reel reel lottery during PTR described later. However, No. The game lock 10 does not occur during the ART preparation even during the ART 5. No. The game lock 11 is referred to as a reel lock 2 during ART5, and when the [ART5] additional special stock lottery is won, the lock time occurs with about 10 seconds when the reel lock lottery during PTR described later is won. However, No. The game lock 11 does not occur during ART preparation even during ART5. No. The 12 game locks occur with a lock time of about 3 seconds when the CZ is activated during the stay at RT0 or the stay at RT1.

<[Normal] ISM mode transfer lottery table>
Next, the [normal] ISM mode transfer lottery table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. As for the [normal] ISM mode transfer lottery table, only the table related to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 37 for convenience, but a table having different contents for each set value may be used, or one table common to each set value. May be

The [normal] ISM mode transfer lottery table is used in the ISM mode transfer lottery for changing (transferring) the ISM mode related to the acquisition rate and the number of ISM points described later in normal time. As the ISM mode of the present embodiment, "normal", "high accuracy" in which the ISM point acquisition rate is higher than "normal", and "super high accuracy" in which the ISM point acquisition rate is higher than "high accuracy" There are three ISM modes. The [normal] ISM mode transfer lottery table shows the group role (loose) of the lottery group A shown in FIG. , Replay, Bell, Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, Middle Cherry, MB, SP Lip, WSP Lip), and the type of ISM mode that is the result of the lottery (normal, high accuracy, ultra high accuracy), reference target and lottery The lottery value corresponding to each of the results is defined.

According to the ISM mode transition lottery using such a [normal] ISM mode transition lottery table, for example, when the group role “Replay” is won, if the ISM mode is normal, the ISM mode has a probability of 253/256. Is maintained as normal, the ISM mode is highly accurately transferred from normal with a probability of 3/256, and the ISM mode is never highly normally transferred from normal. When the group role "Replay" is won and the ISM mode is highly accurate, the ISM mode does not shift from high accuracy to normal, and the ISM mode is highly accurately maintained with a probability of 255/256. With a probability of 256, the ISM mode shifts from high accuracy to ultra-high accuracy. When the group role "Replay" is won, if the ISM mode is ultra-high accuracy, the ISM mode will change from ultra-high accuracy to normal or high accuracy, and there is a 256/256 probability that the ISM mode will be high. High accuracy is maintained.

<[Normal] ISM mode transfer lottery table after changing settings>
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the ISM mode transfer lottery table (setting 1) after changing the [normal] setting will be described. As for the [normal] setting changed ISM mode lottery table, only the table related to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 38 for the sake of convenience, but the table may have different contents for each set value, or may be common to each set value. It may be one table.

The [normal] ISM mode transfer lottery table after setting change is used for the ISM mode transfer lottery for changing (transferring) the ISM mode when the set value is changed. [Normal] The ISM mode transfer lottery table after the setting change has the changed set value (the set value 1 in FIG. 38) to be referenced and the type of the ISM mode that is the result of the lottery (normal, high-accuracy, ultra-high-accuracy). And a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result.

According to the ISM mode transition lottery after setting change using the [normal] ISM mode transition lottery table after setting change, for example, when the setting is changed to 1, the ISM mode after setting change has a probability of 223/256. It is considered normal and highly accurate with a probability of 32/256, and extremely accurate with a probability of 1/256.

<[Regular] ISM lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the [normal] ISM acquisition lottery table (setting 1) will be described. As for the [normal] ISM acquisition lottery table, for convenience, only the table related to the setting 1 is shown in FIG. 39, but one table common to each setting value may be used.

The [normal] ISM acquisition lottery table is used for the ISM acquisition lottery for acquiring ISM points in the normal state. The ISM point is provided as a necessary condition for the CZ lottery described later, and in the present embodiment, the CZ lottery is not performed unless the ISM point is 1 or more. [Normal] The ISM acquisition lottery table shows the group roles (lost, lost,) of the lottery group A shown in FIG. Replay, bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle-stage cherry, MB, SP lip, WSP lip), and ISM points ('0', '3', '5' in this embodiment) given as a lottery result. , '10', '20', '30') and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result.

According to the ISM acquisition lottery using such a [normal] ISM acquisition lottery table, the relative role of “watermelon” or “cherry” (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle-tier cherry) is relatively won at the time of winning. There is a high possibility that ISM points will be awarded as a lottery result, and the degree of expectation of ISM points to be awarded also increases. Further, even when the winning of the “SP Lip” or “WSP Lip” of the group role is possible, there is a possibility that ISM points will be awarded according to the lottery result.

<[Normal] CZ lottery state transition lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the [normal] CZ lottery state transition lottery table (setting 1) will be described. As for the [normal] CZ lottery state transition lottery table, for convenience sake, only the table relating to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 40, but the table may have different contents for each set value, or one table common to each set value. It may be a table.

[Regular] The CZ lottery state transition lottery table is a CZ lottery for shifting (changing) the lottery state (CZ lottery state) of CZ lottery described later periodically every time a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) are exhausted. It is used for state transition lottery. The CZ lottery state determines the easiness of winning of the CZ lottery, and in the present embodiment, three items of “LOW”, “MIDDLE”, and “HIGH” are provided according to the easiness of winning. Depending on the set value, the same winning probability may be obtained, and as shown in FIG. 41 as an example of setting 1, “LOW” and “MIDDLE” may have the same winning probability.

[Regular] The CZ lottery state transition lottery table has a predetermined cycle (cycle A, cycle B, special cycle) to be referred to and a type of the CZ lottery status (“LOW”, “MIDDLE”, “HIGH” that is the result of the lottery. )) and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. The cycle A, the cycle B, and the special cycle are, in advance, the game time points specified for every 50 games, for example, until the number of ceiling games (1000 G in this embodiment) is reached. For example, cycle A corresponds to 100G, 150G, 350G, 500G, 550G, 700G, 750G, 900G, and 950G, and cycle B corresponds to 1G, 50G, 200G, and 250G. It corresponds to the eyes, 400G, 450G, 650G, 800G, and 850G, and the special cycle corresponds to the 300G and 600G. The period A, the period B, and the special period may be randomly changed by lottery or the like.

According to the CZ lottery state transition lottery using such a [normal] CZ lottery state transition lottery table, at the timing of a predetermined game cycle (cycle A, cycle B, special cycle), the type of the CZ lottery state (“LOW , “MIDDLE”, “HIGH”) may change. Further, for example, at the timing of the special cycle, the winning probability of “HIGH”, which is advantageous as the CZ lottery state, is higher than that at the timing of the cycle A and the cycle B. Therefore, the transition lottery that tends to be monotonous periodically is changed. Therefore, it is possible to have the expectation that an advantageous CZ lottery state may be entered at any periodic timing.

<[Normal] CZ lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the [normal] CZ lottery table (setting 1) will be described. As for the [normal] CZ lottery table, only the table related to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 41 for the sake of convenience, but the table may have different contents for each set value, or may be one table common to each set value. Good.

The [normal] CZ lottery table is used for the CZ lottery for determining whether or not to shift from the normal state to CZ or EXCZ when there is one or more ISM points. [Regular] The CZ lottery table is a reference target type of CZ lottery state (“LOW”, “MIDDLE”, “HIGH”), a lottery result (non-winning (not transferable), winning (transferable)), The lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result is defined.

According to the CZ lottery using such a [normal] CZ lottery table, if there is one or more ISM points regardless of the winning combination, for example, if the CZ lottery state is “LOW” or “MIDLLE”, 1/ The winning result of shifting to CZ or EXCZ is obtained with a probability of 32. If the CZ lottery state is “HIGH”, the winning result of shifting to CZ or EXCZ is obtained with a probability of approximately 1/5. Based on such a winning result, the normal state is changed to the CZ or EXCZ through the CZ precursor. In addition, when the CZ lottery is performed even during the CZ sign, and the winning result indicating that the CZ lottery moves to CZ or EXCZ is obtained again, the winning result is stocked until the end of CZ or EXCZ or the end of ART. Based on the winning result, the CZ precursor is passed again to shift to CZ or EXCZ.

<[Normal] ART lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the [normal] ART lottery table will be described. The [normal] ART lottery table is provided for each set value, but may be one table common to each set value.

The [normal] ART lottery table is used for the ART lottery for deciding whether or not to shift from the normal state to the ART when a predetermined condition is satisfied. [Normal] The ART lottery table corresponds to each of the reference value and the setting value (setting 1 to 6) to be referred to, the lottery result (non-winning (ART non-winning), win (ART winning)), and the lottery result. The lottery value to be specified is defined. The predetermined conditions for the ART lottery to be executed are (1) normal state, (2) ISM point is “0”, (3) CZ lottery state is “HIGH”, (4) CZ sign or non-ART sign , (5) When the bell is won, the case where all the conditions of (1) to (5) are satisfied is applicable.

According to the ART lottery using such a [normal] ART lottery table, when all the above conditions (1) to (5) are satisfied, for example, in the case of setting 1, there is a probability of 6/256 in the normal state. The winning result (ART winning) indicating that the process shifts from ART to ART is obtained. Based on such a winning result, the normal state is shifted to the ART (ARTLv2) through the ART sign.

<[CZ1] CZ type lottery table>
Next, the [CZ1] CZ type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. Although the [CZ1] CZ type lottery table is provided for each set value, it may be one table common to each set value. The [CZ1] CZ type lottery table is also provided for each type (“LOW”, “MIDDLE”, “HIGH”) of the CZ lottery state.

The [CZ1] CZ type lottery table is used in the CZ type lottery for determining the type of CZ (“normal CZ”, “confirmed CZ”) according to the result of the CZ lottery immediately before the CZ1G. The [CZ1] CZ type lottery table is provided for each CZ lottery state (“LOW”, “MIDDLE”, “HIGH”), and includes setting values (settings 1 to 6) to be referred to and lottery results (“ “Normal CZ”, “confirmed CZ”), and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. The "normal CZ" means that a predetermined effect is executed up to the 14th G of the CZ, and after that, basically no transition is made to the ART, and the "fixed CZ" executes the predetermined effect until the 14th G of the CZ. After that, the transition to ART will be confirmed. In addition, when the "confirmed CZ" is obtained as the winning result of the CZ type lottery for the 1st CZ, the ART game is forcibly won in the final game ART lottery for the 14th CZ described below.

According to the CZ type lottery using such a [normal] CZ type lottery table, it is possible to determine in advance whether or not to shift to ART in the CZ1G, and based on the determination result, after the CZ14G ends. It is possible to shift to ART (ARTLv2).

<[CZ1] boss lottery table>
Next, the [CZ1] boss lottery table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, for convenience, the [CZ1] boss lottery table shows only the table related to the setting 1 in FIG. 44, but the table may have different contents for each set value, or may be one table common to each set value. ..

The [CZ1] boss lottery table is used in the boss lottery for defining the prescribed number of times condition relating to the type of the boss character appearing in the CZ14G in the CZ1G. As the number-of-times condition, the number of winnings of the group role “replay” in the CZs 2 to 11G (replay winning number) is targeted. A boss character that raises the expectation of ART entry appears on CZ14G. In the present embodiment, as the boss character appearing on the CZ14Gth, a normal boss and a specific boss are provided, and the specific boss of these is a boss character with a high expectation of ART rush.

The [CZ1] boss lottery table defines a set value to be a reference target, a specified number of times condition (0 to 3 times) to be a lottery result, and a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. In the case of setting 1, for example, the specified number of times condition is set to “3 times” with a probability of 232/256, the specified number of times condition is set to “2 times” with a probability of 18/256, and specified with a probability of 4/256. The number-of-times condition is set to “1 time” and the specified number-of-times condition is set to “0 times” with a probability of 2/256. The smaller the number of times set as the prescribed number of times condition, the easier the condition is satisfied, and the more specific boss appears on the CZ14G.

According to the boss lottery using the [CZ1] boss lottery table, the condition (prescribed number condition) for causing the specific boss to appear in the CZ final game on the CZ1G can be determined in advance. Based on the above conditions, a specific boss can be made to appear on the CZ14G in accordance with the number of replay wins on the CZ2 to 11G. In other words, even if the number of replay wins is small, the specific boss may appear depending on the specified number of times conditions, so that the specific boss can appear irregularly without depending on the uniform condition, and as a result, the expectation of the ART rush is expected. The degree can be increased moderately.

<[CZ1-13G] skill point lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table (setting 1) will be described. Note that, for convenience of the [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table, only the table related to the setting 1 is shown in FIG. 45, but the table may have different contents for each set value, or one table common to each set value. May be

The [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table is used for a technique point lottery for acquiring technique points which determine the ranks of techniques (technique ranks A to E) to be described later with respect to the boss character in the CZ1 to 13G. .. The technique rank is used as a parameter in which the effect of defeating the boss character is more likely to be executed as the number of technique points acquired increases. In accordance with the number of accumulated skill points (total number), meters are displayed in the CZ1 to 13G, and the more the number of skill points is acquired, the more the number of meters displayed so as to increase the expectation of an effective skill rank. The display color is designed to change. In the present embodiment, with regard to technique points, when the number of acquisitions is 0 to 4, it is the technique rank A, when the number of acquisitions is 5 to 9, it is the technique rank B, and when the number of acquisitions is 10 to 14, it is the technique rank C. When the number is 15 to 19, the skill rank is D, and when the number is 20, the skill rank E is obtained. When the number of skill points acquired exceeds 20, the number of acquired skill points is corrected to the upper limit of 20.

The [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table is used for the technique point lottery for acquiring the technique points as described above. The [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table is a reference target of the lottery group A shown in FIG. 33 described above (miss, replay, bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle-stage cherry, MB, SP lip, WSP Lip), and technique points (in the present embodiment, "0", "1", "3", "5", "10", "15", "20") given as a lottery result, refer to The lottery value corresponding to each of the target and the lottery result is defined.

According to the technique point lottery using the [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table, in the case of winning the group role “watermelon” or “cherry” (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle-tier cherry), which is a rare role, relative As a result, the possibility that the skill points will be awarded as a lottery result becomes higher, and the expectation of the technique points to be granted also increases.

<[CZ14G] Final Game ART Lottery Table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the [CZ14G] final game ART lottery table (setting 1) will be described. Note that the [CZ14G] final game ART lottery table shows only the table related to setting 1 in FIG. 46 for convenience, but may have different contents for each set value, or may be a table common to each set value. Good.

The [CZ14G] final game ART lottery table is used in the final game ART lottery for deciding whether or not to shift to ART in the 14th game which is the final game of CZ. [CZ14G] The final game ART lottery table has a boss character (normal boss or specific boss) determined according to the number of replay wins of CZ2 to 11G, and a skill rank determined according to skill points of CZ1 to 13G. A plurality of (A to E) combinations are provided. [CZ14G] The final game ART lottery table has a combination of a boss character (normal boss, specific boss) to be referred to and a skill rank (A to E), a lottery result (non-winning (ART non-winning), and a winning (ART). Lottery)) and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result.

According to the final game ART lottery using the [CZ14G] final game ART lottery table, for example, a winning result (ART winning) that the player shifts to ART according to the combination of the normal boss and the skill rank A is obtained. In this case, the normal boss appears on the CZ14G, and an effect that defeats the normal boss is executed by activating a technique corresponding to the technique rank A, and the process shifts to ART (ARTLv2). In addition, it is easier to win an ART when a specific boss appears than a normal boss, and it is easier to win an ART as the skill rank increases from A to E. Can be raised. When the “determined CZ” has been determined by the CZ type lottery of the CZ1G described above, the game shifts to ART regardless of the result of the final game ART lottery. You may make it produce the production according to the combination of.

<[CZ14G] Final Game Revival Lottery Table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the [CZ14G] final game revival lottery table (setting 1) will be described. Note that the [CZ14G] final game revival lottery table shows only the table related to setting 1 in FIG. 47 for convenience, but may have different contents for each set value, or may be a table common to each set value. Good.

[CZ14G] The final game revival lottery table shows that in the 14th game, which is the final game of CZ, when the result of ART non-winning is obtained in the final game ART lottery described above, there is a possibility of winning the ART depending on the winning combination. It is used in a lottery for the final game resurrection. [CZ14G] The final game revival lottery table is used as a reference target of the lottery group A shown in FIG. 33 (Loss, Replay, Bell, Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, Middle Cherry, MB, SP Lip, WSP). Lip), a lottery result (non-win (ART non-win), win (ART win)), and a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result.

According to the final game revival lottery using the [CZ14G] final game revival lottery table, in the final game (14G) of the CZ, the non-winning result is obtained by the final game ART lottery unrelated to the winning combination. Even if it is, there is a possibility of winning the ART depending on the winning combination (group combination), and if the result of the ART winning is obtained by this final game revival lottery, the winning boss character is defeated. A losing effect is executed, and the process shifts to ART (ARTLv2).

<[EXCZ] lottery table for adding number of games>
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the [EXCZ] game number addition lottery table (setting 1) will be described. Note that the [EXCZ] number-of-games lottery table is shown in FIG. 48 for convenience only, but may be a table having different contents for each set value, or a table common to each set value. Good.

The [EXCZ] game number addition lottery table is used in the game number addition lottery for adding the number of EXCZ games in EXCZ. [EXCZ] The number-of-games addition lottery table is a reference target of the lottery group A shown in FIG. Rip), a lottery result (non-winning lottery, winning (3G, 5G, 7G)), and a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result.

According to the number-of-games addition lottery using the [EXCZ] number-of-games addition lottery table, the number of EXCZ games is set to “rare” (watermelon) or “cherry” (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle-tier cherry) as a rare role. Since the period of EXCZ can be extended by adding according to the winning of ), it can be differentiated from the CZ set to a fixed number of games (14G) and the playability can be improved.

<[ART 1, 2, 3, 4] Level-up lottery table>
Next, the [ART 1, 2, 3, 4] level-up lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 49 to 53, the [ART1, 2, 3, 4] level-up lottery table is provided for each internal level such as ART1 to 4 and ART4 (previous ART5). It may be a table common to all. Further, although the level-up lottery table corresponding to ART4 is provided differently when changing from ART3 to ART4 and when changing from ART5 to ART4 (see FIGS. 52 and 53), these tables It may be a common table without distinction. Further, the [ART1, 2, 3, 4] level-up lottery table is provided for each set value, but it may be one table common to each set value.

The [ART 1, 2, 3, 4] level-up lottery table is used in the level-up lottery for internally determining the transition of the ART level (ART 1 to 4) in ART 1 to 4. The internal ARTs 1 to 4 and the production ARTLvs 1 to 4 basically proceed at the same level so that they are promoted and demoted one step at a time according to the result of the level-up lottery. Executed. However, in the present embodiment, in the ARTLv2 preset as a specific ART level, basically, if the level-up lottery is won before the prescribed number of games (20G) is exhausted as one set, the ART2 is internally set. Although the process shifts from ARTLv3 to ART3, in terms of effects, an effect that is relegated from ARTLv2 to ARTLv1 is executed. In addition, ARTLv2 (ART2) may be continued for a predetermined number of games or more (for one set or more) based on the winning result of the loop lottery or the loop guaranteed number lottery described later.

[ART1,2,3,4] The level-up lottery table is distinguished by internal ART1 to 4 and ART4 (previous ART5), and is a reference target for each set value (setting 1 to 6). The lottery group A group roles shown in 33 (Loose, Replay, Bell, Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, Middle Cherry, MB, SP Lip, WSP Lip), lottery results (non-winning, winning), reference target and The lottery value corresponding to each lottery result is defined. Note that the level-up lottery table (ART4 (previous ART5)) of FIG. 53 used when the previous time is ART5 corresponds to a predetermined group combination (SP lip) than the level-up lottery table (ART4) of FIG. Although the lottery value is defined so that it is difficult to win in the level-up lottery, the lottery value may be defined so that it is easier to win the lottery.

According to the level-up lottery using the [ART 1, 2, 3, 4] level-up lottery table, the following effects can be executed.

For example, in the present embodiment, in the specific ART levels ARTLv2 and ARTLv4, a screen for selecting an opponent character corresponding to each level is displayed at the start of each, and an effect such that the opponent character is determined is executed. It In addition, in the final stage of ARTLv2 and ARTLv4, a battle effect corresponding to each level is executed. Then, in ARTLv2, for example, level-up lottery is performed according to the group combination for each game until the prescribed number of games (20G) is exhausted, and an effect of playing against a character is executed. In such an ARTLv2, when the level-up lottery is not won, the ARTLv2 is demoted to the ARTLv1. On the other hand, when a lottery is won in the level-up lottery, although the game is internally transferred from ART2 to ART3 after the prescribed number of games is exhausted, the effect is that it is demoted from ARTLv2 to ARTLv1. After that, in ARTLv1 that becomes ART3 internally, even if you do not win the level-up lottery, an effect of being promoted to ARTLv2 after the prescribed number of games has been exhausted is executed, and by internally shifting to ART2 as well. It returns to the state where the production level and the internal level match. In addition, in the ARTLv1 which is internally the ART3, even if the player wins the level-up lottery two or more times, an effect of being promoted after the prescribed number of games is exhausted is executed. In this case, Internally, the process moves from ART3 to ART4, further from ART4 to ART5 through specialization preparation and the like. Therefore, in the final stage of ARTLv2, the production is promoted from ARTLv4 to ARTLv5 by switching to the battle production showing that it was actually ARTLv4. Even if the level-up lottery is not won in the specific ARTLv2, there is a case where the lottery or the loop guarantee frequency lottery described later is won at the start of the ARTLv2. In this case, the ARTLv2 will be continued for two sets of 40 G or more, but even during such continuation of the ARTLv2, if the player wins the level-up lottery in the same manner as above, an effect that is demoted as an effect is executed. ..

According to such a stepwise effect of ART, it is possible to basically perform an effect such that the level is promoted and demoted one step at a time, but in a specific ARTLv2, even if the player wins the level-up lottery. Since a production that seems to be demoted is executed, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the number of games has increased by demoting once and then promoting it rather than when demoting after promotion, thereby enhancing the fun of the game be able to. At the end of ARTLv2, there is a possibility that a production showing two or more stages of promotion will be given to ARTLv4, etc., so there is the expectation that there may be such two or more stages of promotion while playing the game. Can be promoted, which also enhances the interest of the game. Further, in the ARTLv1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the appearance of easier promotion than the promotion based on the probability of the actual level-up lottery, and it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for promotion.

<[ART2] Loop Guarantee Number Lottery Table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the [ART2] loop guaranteed frequency lottery table (setting 1) will be described. Note that, for convenience, only the table related to the setting 1 is shown in FIG. 54 as the [ART2] guaranteed loop number random determination table, but a table having different contents for each setting value may be used, or as a table common to each setting value. Good.

[ART2] The loop guarantee frequency random determination table is used in the loop guarantee frequency random determination for determining the loop guarantee frequency described later at the start of ARTLv2 (ART2). The loop guarantee count means the number of times that the specific guarantee of the ARTLv2 is guaranteed to be continued once or more when the loop guarantee count lottery is won. For example, if the number of times the loop is guaranteed is one and the winning is made, if the above-mentioned level-up lottery is not won, an effect indicating continuation is executed, and when the ARTLv2 basically ends with one set 20G, another set 20G is given. By doing so, it continues until 40 G is digested. If the number of guaranteed loops is 2 or 3 and the winning is won, 2 sets 40G or 3 sets 60G of ARTLv2 is given in the same manner as above, and the process continues until 60G or 80G is digested. However, if the number of guaranteed loops is 3 and the winning is level-up lottery for the second set of ARTLv2, one of the 3 guaranteed numbers of loops has been exhausted as the second set. On the other hand, the loop guarantee count of 2 is retained as it is because the remaining 2 sets have not been digested yet. Even if the ARTLv2 wins the level-up lottery according to the guaranteed number of times of the loop, it will be demoted to the ARTLv1 in terms of the performance while internally shifting to ART3, but the level-up lottery that is being continued. Depending on the winning, it may be internally transferred to ART3 and may be promoted to ARTLv3 in terms of performance.

[ART2] The loop guarantee number lottery table is referred to by a grade (common first time, A to C) to be referred to later, a loop guarantee number (non-winning (0 times), 1 to 3 times) which is a lottery result, and The lottery value corresponding to each of the target and the lottery result is defined. The grade is a parameter (grade, continuation rate) for changing a loop rate, which is determined at the time of winning an ART and determines whether or not to continue a specific ARTLv2. It is used when lottery determines the loop rate. For example, when there is no initial winning of ART winning, and the first ARTLv2 (ART2) is started, the grade common initial is applied, the probability of loop winning is determined to be 0 as a non-winning probability with 169/256, and 79/256 of The probability of loop guarantee is determined to be 1, the probability of loop guarantee is determined to be 2 at a probability of 8/256, and the guarantee count of loop is not determined to be 3 times. It should be noted that the grades A to C are determined at the time of winning the ART, and are applied when the grade is relegated to ARTLv2 after the ART is finished. By the way, in the setting 1, although the loop guaranteed number lottery is performed when ARTLv2 is started after the ART is finished, the loop guaranteed number is determined to be 1 to 3 times according to the regulation contents of the [ART2] loop guaranteed number lottery table. It will always be 0 (non-win) without being played. In addition, if a lottery or a loop lottery to be described later is won before the guaranteed number of loops is used, the winning result is prioritized, the guaranteed number of loops is not used, and the level is increased in the next ARTLv2. If the lottery or the loop lottery is not won, the ARTLv2 is continued using the guaranteed loop count.

According to such a loop guaranteed number lottery using the [ART2] loop guaranteed number lottery table, when a particular ARTLv2 is entered, the loop guaranteed number is determined as the set number of the ARTLv2, and there is no winning by the level-up lottery. Even so, since ARTLv2 can be continued until the number of games including the set number determined as the guaranteed loop count is exhausted, it is possible to increase the chances of winning by the level-up lottery during ARTLv2, and the expectation for promotion. Can be raised.

<[ART4] Victory Reward Lottery Table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the [ART4] winning reward lottery table will be described. The [ART4] winning reward lottery table is provided for each set value, but may be one table common to each set value.

[ART4] The winning reward lottery table is used for winning reward lottery for determining the reward when winning in the battle effect executed in this ARTLv4 at the start of ARTLv4 (ART4). The victory of the battle effect occurs in the final game (20G) of ARTLv4 when the winning result is obtained by the above-mentioned level-up lottery in ART4, or when BB is determined as the internal winning combination. In the case of the non-winning of the level-up lottery in the ARTLv4 or the BB non-winning in the final game, the reward determined at the start of the ARTLv4 is not obtained and is discarded. The reward is obtained as PTR1 to PTR3 in the additional specialized zone, and the number of games tends to increase in the order of PTR1, PTR2, and PTR3, and the average number of acquired games as the number of additional games also increases.

[ART4] The winning reward lottery table has reference values (settings 1 to 6), rewards (PTR1, PTR2, PTR3) that are lottery results, and lottery values corresponding to each of the reference objects and the lottery results. Is prescribed. For example, in the case of setting 1, PTR1 is determined as a reward with a probability of 192/256, PTR2 is determined as a reward with a probability of 46/256, and PTR3 is determined as a reward with a probability of 18/256. In addition, when promotion to ARTLv5 is confirmed according to another trigger, the winning reward lottery using the [ART4] winning reward lottery table is canceled, and the PTR type using the [ALL] PTR type lottery table described later. Rewards (PTR1 to 3) are determined by lottery. In addition, in ARTLv4, in order to perform the PTR stock described later when winning BB2, the rewards (PTR1 to 3) already determined by the winning reward lottery using the [ART4] winning reward lottery table may be referred to.

According to the winning reward lottery using the [ART4] winning reward lottery table, the type of the PTR as the additional specialized zone can be determined in advance, and the production can smoothly proceed from ARTLv4 to ARTLv5. You can

<[ART5] Addition state transition lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the [ART5] additional state transition lottery table (setting 1) will be described. Note that, for convenience, only the table relating to the setting 1 is shown in FIG. 56 as the [ART5] addition state transition lottery table, but a table having different contents for each setting value may be used, or as a table common to each setting value. Good.

[ART5] Addition state transition lottery table is an addition state for changing (shifting) the addition state (normal, high-accuracy, ultra-high-accuracy) related to the number of games in ART5 (ARTLv5, ART preparation) Used for transfer lottery. As the additional state of the present embodiment, "normal", "high accuracy" in which the expectation of the number of additional games is larger than "normal", and "super high" in which the expectation of the number of additional games is larger than "high accuracy" There are three additional states such as "Sure". [ART5] The additional lottery state transition lottery table shows the group role (loose) of the lottery group B shown in FIG. 33, which is the reference target, for each additional state (normal time, high accuracy time, super high accuracy time) during the stay. , Replay, Bell, Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, Middle Cherry, MB, SP Lip, WSP Lip, BB), and the addition state (normal, high accuracy, ultra high accuracy) of the transfer destination that will result in the lottery. The lottery value corresponding to each of the target and the lottery result is defined. In the present embodiment, the addition state transition lottery is executed when the BB1 is won, but is not executed during the BB2 winning, the BB1 (normal BB) and the BB2 (special BB), and the special preparation. Has become. Further, when the ARTLv1 to 4 are being executed as the effect, the addition state transition lottery is not executed. The result of the addition state transition lottery is applied as the addition state of the next game. The initial value of the additional state is set as "normal", and is set as "normal" in the final game of ARTLv5.

According to the addition state transition lottery using the [ART5] addition state transition lottery table, when the group role “watermelon” or “cherry” (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) which is a rare role is won, The chances of winning "High Probability" or "Super High Probability" are high, and the higher the "High Probability" or "Super High Probability" is, the more difficult it is to shift to "Normal". It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by extension.

<[ART5] Additional lottery A table>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, [ART5] additional lottery A table will be described. As shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, the [ART5] additional lottery A table is provided for each additional state (normal, high-accuracy, ultra-high accuracy) and set values (settings 1 to 6). By using common lottery value data, the data size of the entire table is suppressed.

[ART5] The additional lottery A table is used in the additional lottery A for determining the later-described additional game number lottery table (Tables 1 to 7) relating to the additional game number in ART5. The additional lottery A is executed during ARTLv5, during ART preparation, or during PTR1 to 3. In the present embodiment, the additional lottery A is executed when the BB1 is won, but is not executed during the BB2 winning, the BB1 (normal BB) and the BB2 (special BB), and the special preparation. ing.

As shown in FIG. 57, the [ART5] add-on lottery A table (normal) is a table that is referred to when the add-on state is “normal” and is a basic table, and set values (settings 1 to 6). For each of the lottery group B to be referred to (watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle-tier cherry) and a special role (BB1) belonging to the group combination "BB", the lottery result (non-winning, Tables 1 to 7) ) And a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. For example, when the addition state is "normal" and the setting is 1, when the watermelon is won, the probability of 230/256 is non-winning, the probability of Table 1 is determined with the probability of 6/256, and the table 2 is determined with the probability of 17/256. The table 3 is determined with a probability of 2/256, the table 4 is determined with a probability of 1/256, and the tables 5 to 7 are not determined.

As shown in FIG. 58, the [ART5] add-on lottery A table (high-accuracy) is a table that is referred to when the add-on state is “high-accuracy”. The [ART5] additional lottery A table (high accuracy), like the [ART5] additional lottery A table (normal), defines the reference target, the lottery result, and the lottery value. However, for some of the lottery values, [ART5] It is defined as a value obtained by doubling or standardizing the corresponding lottery value in the additional lottery A table (normal). That is, the lottery values corresponding to Tables 1 to 4 that are won in the lottery result when the watermelon is won in the case of “high accuracy” and setting 1 are not specified as actual lottery values, and [ART5] additional lottery A table The corresponding lottery value defined in (normal) is doubled and used. As a result, for example, when the addition state is “high accuracy” and the setting is 1, when the watermelon is won, the probability of 204/256 is non-winning, the probability of table 1 is determined by 12/256, and the probability of 34/256 is determined. Table 2 is not determined, table 3 is determined with a probability of 4/256, table 4 is determined with a probability of 2/256, and tables 5 to 7 are not determined. Similarly, in the case of "high accuracy" and settings 2 to 6, the actual lottery value when the lottery result when the watermelon is won is also not specified, and [ART5] additional lottery A table ( The corresponding lottery value defined in (normal) is doubled and used. In addition, in the case of “high accuracy” and settings 1 to 6, in the case of strong cherry winning, middle cherry winning, or BB1 winning, when the lottery result of the lottery results in winning, [ART5] additional lottery A table ( The corresponding lottery value defined in (normal) is used as it is as a common value. According to such [ART5] additional lottery A table (high accuracy), the data size can be made smaller than that of [ART5] additional lottery A table (normal) in which all actual lottery values are defined.

As shown in FIG. 59, the [ART5] add-on lottery A table (ultra-high accuracy) is a table that is referred to when the addition status is "ultra-high accuracy". The [ART5] additional lottery A table (ultra-high accuracy), like the [ART5] additional lottery A table (normal), defines the reference target, the lottery result, and the lottery value, but some of the lottery values Is defined as a value obtained by doubling or standardizing the corresponding lottery value in the [ART5] additional lottery A table (normal) or the [ART5] additional lottery A table (high accuracy). That is, in the case of “ultra high accuracy” and setting 1, the lottery values corresponding to the tables 1 to 4 which are won in the lottery result when the watermelon is won are not specified as actual lottery values, and [ART5] additional lottery A The corresponding lottery value in the table (high accuracy) is doubled and used. In short, [ART5] The corresponding lottery value defined in the additional lottery A table (normal) is multiplied by 4 and used. As a result, for example, when the addition state is “ultra-high accuracy” and the setting is 1, when the watermelon is won, the probability of 152/256 is non-win, and the probability of table 1 is determined with the probability of 24/256, and the probability of 68/256. The table 2 is determined by the above, the table 3 is determined by the probability of 8/256, the table 4 is determined by the probability of 4/256, and the tables 5 to 7 are not determined. Similarly, the actual value is not specified for the lottery value when the lottery result when the watermelon is won is "super-high accuracy" and the setting is 2 to 6, and [ART5] additional lottery A table The lottery value corresponding to (high accuracy) is doubled (the corresponding lottery value defined in normal times is multiplied by 4) and used. In addition, in the case of "ultra-high accuracy" and setting 1 to 6, the lottery value when the lottery result when the weak cherry is won is also selected is [ART5] in addition to the corresponding lottery value in the additional lottery A table (high accuracy). It is adapted to be used after being doubled (corresponding lottery value which is usually defined is multiplied by 4). In addition, in the case of "ultra-high accuracy" and settings 1 to 6, when lottery results are obtained when the lottery result of the strong cherry lottery, the middle cherry lottery, or the BB1 lottery is won, [ART5] Additional lottery A table The corresponding lottery value defined in (normal) is used as it is as a common value. The data size can be reduced also by such [ART5] additional lottery A table (ultra high accuracy).

<[ART5] Additional lottery B table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, [ART5] additional lottery B table (setting 1) will be described. Note that, for convenience, only the table related to the setting 1 is shown in FIG. 60 as the [ART5] additional lottery B table, but the table may have different contents for each setting value, or may be one table common to each setting value. Good.

[ART5] The additional lottery B table is an additional lottery table (Tables 1 to 7) for determining an additional game number lottery table (Tables 1 to 7) relating to the number of additional games in BB1 (normal BB), PTR1 to 3 and RUSH. Used for lottery B. [ART5] The additional lottery B table is used only when the winning of the group combination "SP Lip" belonging to the lottery group B of BB1 (normal BB), PTR1 to 3 and RUSH or the winning of "WSP Lip" is won. It is a table, and defines the group roles "SP Lip" and "WSP Lip" to be referenced, the lottery result (non-winning, Tables 1 to 7), and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. ing. For example, when the winning combination “SP Lip” is won during BB1 (normal BB) of setting 1, the additional lottery B is executed, the table 5 is determined with a probability of 250/256, and the table 6 is determined with a probability of 6/256. Is determined, and non-winning or the tables 1 to 4 and 7 are not determined.

<[ART5] Special additional lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the [ART5] special addition lottery table will be described. The [ART5] special addition lottery table is provided for each set value (settings 1 to 6), but may be one table common to each set value.

[ART5] The special addition lottery table is a special addition lottery table for determining a later-described addition game number lottery table (Tables 1 to 7) related to the number of additional games when replay is won 10 times in a row in PTR2. Used. [ART5] The special addition lottery table includes setting values (settings 1 to 6) to be referred to, lottery results (non-winning, tables 1 to 7), and lottery values corresponding to each of the reference objects and lottery results. Stipulates. For example, in PTR2 of setting 1, a predetermined fixed number of games will be added up to 9 consecutive winnings of the group role "Replay", while special winning will be added if the winning of the group role "Replay" is consecutive 10 times. The lottery is executed, the table 5 is determined with a probability of 220/256, the table 6 is determined with a probability of 33/256, and the table 7 is determined with a probability of 3/256.

<[ART5] Addition game number lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, [ART5] additional game number lottery table will be described. [ART5] The additional game number lottery table is divided into tables 1 to 7. Further, the [ART5] additional game lottery table (tables 1 to 7) is provided for each set value (settings 1 to 6), but may be one table common to each set value.

[ART5] In addition to the number-of-addition lottery table, in the ARTLv5, PTR, RUSH, or normal BB (BB1), the tables 1 to 7 corresponding to the case of winning in the various addition lottery described above are selected and added. Used for lottery of additional games to determine the number of games. [ART5] The additional game number lottery table has setting values (settings 1 to 6) to be referenced, the number of additional games to be the result of the lottery (10, 20, 30, 50, 123, 321), the reference target and the lottery. The lottery value corresponding to each of the results is defined. For example, when the additional game number lottery is executed with reference to the setting 1 in Table 2, the additional game number is “10” with a probability of 226/256, and the additional game number is “20” with a probability of 16/256. "," with a probability of 8/256, "30" as the number of additional games, probability of 4/256 with "50" as the additional number of games, and probability of 2/256 with the additional number of games" There is no possibility of acquiring 123' and acquiring '321' as the number of additional games. Such tables 1 to 7 are commonly used according to the winning result (selection result) of the additional lottery A and B, and the additional lottery A and B also use different additional lottery A table and additional lottery B table, respectively. Since the lottery is performed, it is possible to prevent the number of additional games from being monotonically determined by the lottery.

<[ART5] Addition Specialized Stock Lottery A Table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, [ART5] additional specialized stock lottery A table (setting 1 will be described. Note that, for convenience, the [ART5] additional specialized stock lottery A table includes only the table related to setting 1. As shown in FIG. 63, a table having different contents for each set value may be used, or one table common to each set value may be used.

[ART5] The add-on specialized stock lottery A table is used in the add-on specialized stock lottery A for activating "RUSH" or "PTR" when the above-mentioned add-on lottery A is won in ART5. [ART5] The additional special stock lottery A table is a reference target of the lottery group B shown in FIG. 33 (Loss, Replay, Bell, Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, Middle Cherry, MB, SP Lip). , WSP Lip, BB), a lottery result (non-win, “RUSH”, “PTR”), and a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. For example, if you win with the additional lottery A when winning the watermelon of the group role, the additional special stock lottery A will be executed, with a probability of 128/256, you will be unwinned, and with a probability of 102/256, you will be awarded with "RUSH". , 26/256 with a probability of "PTR". When “RUSH” is won, the number of predictive games that suggests a transition from ARTLv5 to RUSH is determined by the number of predictive game lottery described below. If "RUSH" is won again while the precursor game in ARTLv5 is being digested, the precursor game number lottery is not re-executed, only the information indicating that "RUSH" is won is stocked, and the precursor is again shown after the end of RUSH. The number of games lottery is executed, and the number of precursor games is determined. When the "PTR" is won, one of PTR1 to 3 is determined by lottery of the PTR type described later during specialization preparation after the existing number of games is consumed.

According to the additional specialized stock lottery A using the [ART5] additional specialized stock lottery A table, whether or not to shift to RUSH and the type of PTR (PTR1 to 3) should be determined in advance. Based on the determination result, it is possible to shift from ARTLv5 to RUSH, or shift from specialized preparation to any of PTR1 to 3.

<[ART5] Specialized lottery B table for addition>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64-66, the [ART5] additional specialized stock lottery B table will be described. As shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the [ART5] additional specialized stock lottery B table is provided for each additional state (normal, high accuracy, ultra high accuracy) and set value (settings 1 to 6). However, it may be one table that is common to any of the added states or one table that is common to each set value.

[ART5] The add-on specialized stock lottery B table is used for the add-on specialized stock lottery B for activating "RUSH" or "PTR" when the above-mentioned add-on lottery B is won in PTR1 to PTR3. [ART5] In the additional special stock lottery B table, for each set value (settings 1 to 6), the group role (miss, replay, bell, watermelon, weak cherry) of the lottery group B shown in FIG. , Strong cherry, middle-tier cherry, MB, SP lip, WSP lip, BB), lottery result (non-win, “RUSH”, “PTR”), and a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. doing. [ART5] In addition special stock lottery B table, the lottery value is defined so that the additional special stock lottery B is mainly won when the winning of the group roles “SP Lip” and “WSP Lip” is won. When the "SP Lip" is won, the activation of "RUSH" is mainly stocked, and when the "WSP Lip" is won, the activation of "PTR" is mainly stocked. For example, as shown in FIG. 64, in the case where the addition state is “normal” and the setting is 1, if the addition lottery B is won when the SP lip is won, the addition special stock lottery B is executed and 254/256 There is a probability of non-winning, a probability of 2/256 is "RUSH", and there is no winning of "PTR". When "RUSH" is won, the precursor game is not executed and the process shifts to RUSH. In addition, when the "WSP Lip" is won and the "PTR" is won, the winning result is stocked, and after the existing number of games is exhausted, one of PTR1 to 3 by the PTR type lottery to be described later during specialization preparation. After it is determined, the stocked PTR is activated.

According to the additional specialized stock lottery B using the [ART5] additional specialized stock lottery B table, the transition to RUSH and the activation of PTR can be stocked, and the stocked RUSH and PTR can be stocked. Can be activated ex post. Note that the additional special stock lottery B is not executed in the BB (normal BB, special BB) or when the stock of “RUSH” already exists.

<[ALL] PTR type lottery table>
Next, the [ALL] PTR type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 67. The [ALL] PTR type lottery table is provided for each set value (settings 1 to 6), but may be one table common to each set value.

The [ALL] PTR type lottery table is used for the PTR type lottery for determining the types of PTR1 to 3 when the shift to the PTR is decided (stock). The reasons for deciding to move to PTR (stock) are as follows: when BB2 is won (stock number 1), red bar pattern in BB2 (special BB) is aligned (stock number 1), red in BB2 (special BB) There are opportunities such as when the bar W symbols are aligned (stock number 2), when the red bar symbols in EXCZ are aligned (stock number 1), and when the PTR winning by the special stock lottery A and B described above (number of stocks 1) is won.

The [ALL] PTR type lottery table shows reference setting values (settings 1 to 6), PTR types (PTR1 to 3) that are lottery results, and lottery values corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. Stipulates. For example, in the case of setting 1, in the PTR type lottery, PTR1 is determined with a probability of 192/256, PTR2 is determined with a probability of 46/256, and PTR3 is determined with a probability of 18/256. The PTR1 to PTR3 thus determined will be activated through specialization preparation.

<[Normal, CZ] ART Grade Lottery Table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a [normal, CZ] ART grade lottery table will be described. The [normal, CZ] ART grade lottery table is provided for each of “CZ”, “direct hit”, and “BB2” as shown in FIG. Further, the [normal, CZ] ART grade lottery table is provided for each set value (settings 1 to 6), but may be one table common to each set value.

The [normally CZ] ART grade lottery table is used for the ART grade lottery for determining the grade (grades A to C) at the time of winning the ART. Specifically, when the ART winning is selected in the final game ART lottery of the 14th CZ game or the final game revival lottery, the ART grade lottery table (CZ) is referred to, and when the ART lottery is selected in the normal ART lottery, MB When the number of ceiling games is reached when ART is won in accordance with the middle middle cherry prize, the ART grade lottery table (direct hit) is referred to, and when BB2 is won while the game is not in ART, the ART grade lottery table ( BB2) is referred to, and the ART grade lottery is executed using each table. Note that the grade cannot be rewritten even if BB2 is won during ART.

The [normally CZ] ART grade lottery table has a setting value (settings 1 to 6) that is a reference target, an ART grade (grades A to C) that is a lottery result, and a lottery corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. It defines the value and. For example, in the case of setting 1, and in the case of ART winning in the final game ART lottery of the 14th CZ game, the setting 1 of the [normal, CZ] ART grade lottery table (CZ) is referred to, and in the ART grade lottery, 196/256. The grade A is determined with the probability of, the grade B is determined with the probability of 52/256, and the grade C is determined with the probability of 8/256. The grades A to C determined in this way are used in the loop rate lottery described later, and eventually change the winning probability of the loop lottery described later.

<[Normal, ART5] Preliminary game number lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the [normal, ART 5] precursor game number lottery table (setting 1) will be described. Note that, for convenience, the [normal, ART 5] omen game lottery table shows only the table related to setting 1 in FIG. 69, but the table may have different contents for each set value, or one table common to each set value. It may be a table.

[Usually, ART5] The precursor game number lottery table shows the corresponding winning state (CZ, CZ winning by CZ lottery, ART winning by ART lottery, or RUSH winning by additional special stock lottery). It is used in the precursor game number lottery for determining the number of games of CZ precursor or ART precursor or RUSH precursor until the activation of ART, RUSH). The CZ and RUSH may be stocked, and if there is stock after the end of CZ or after the end of RUSH, the precursor game number lottery is performed again and the stocked CZ or RUSH is released after the precursor game. There are cases. As for the priority order of activation, the game with ART precursor has priority over the game with CZ precursor. For example, if there is an ART winning during the execution of the CZ precursor game, the number of ART precursor games is rewritten. Furthermore, when there is a BB winning during the execution of the precursor game, the precursor game number lottery is again performed after the BB ends.

[Usually, ART5] The number-of-games lottery table indicates the lottery timings to be referenced (at the time of CZ winning, CZ, RUSH stock release, at ART winning, at addition special (RUSH) winning), and a lottery result. It defines the number of games (0 to 8) and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. For example, in the case of winning the CZ, the number of CZ precursor games is not determined as '0', the number of precursor games is determined as '1' with a probability of 10/256, and the probability of CZ precursor games with a probability of 162/256. The number is determined to be "2", the number of CZ precursor games is determined to be "3" with a probability of 20/256, the number of CZ precursor games is determined to be "4" with a probability of 1/256, and a probability of 1/256. The number of CZ precursor games is determined to be "5", the probability of CZ precursor games is determined to be "6" with a probability of 1/256, and the number of CZ precursor games is determined to be "7" with a probability of 16/256. The number of CZ precursor games is determined to be "8" with a probability of /256. Based on the number of predictive games determined in this way, the predictive game suggesting the transition to CZ, ART, or RUSH will be executed in the normal state, CZ, or ART5 (ARTLv5).

<[ART2,5] Loop rate lottery table>
Next, the [ART2, 5] loop rate random determination table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, for convenience, the [ART2, 5] loop rate lottery table shows only the table related to the setting 1 in FIG. 70, but the table may have different contents for each set value, or one table common to each set value. May be

The [ART2, 5] loop rate lottery table is used in the loop rate lottery for determining the loop rate for changing the winning probability (continuation probability) of the loop lottery described later. The loop rate lottery is executed at the time of transition to ARTLv2 or at the time of transition to RUSH. The [ART2, 5] loop rate lottery table corresponds to each of the ART grade (grades A to C, RUSH) that is the reference target, the loop rate (A to D) that is the lottery result, and the reference target and the lottery result. The lottery value is specified. For example, in the case of grade A, the loop rate A is determined with a probability of 221/256, the loop rate B is determined with a probability of 30/256, the loop rate C is determined with a probability of 4/256, and The loop rate D is determined by the probability. The higher the loop rate from A to D, the easier it is to win the loop lottery described later. Based on the loop rate determined in this way, the loop lottery will be executed.

<[ART2,5] Loop lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the [ART2, 5] loop lottery table (setting 1) will be described. Note that, for convenience of the [ART2, 5] loop lottery table, only the table related to the setting 1 is shown in FIG. 71, but the table may have different contents for each set value, or may be a table common to each set value. Good.

The [ART2, 5] loop lottery table is used for the loop lottery for determining whether or not the ARTLv2 and RUSH are continued beyond the specified number of games. The loop lottery is executed at the 3rd G of RUSH when moving to ARTLv2, when moving to RUSH. For example, when a lottery is won in the transition to ARTLv2, a loop flag is set as a winning result, and when the ARTLv2 does not win in the level-up lottery even if 20G of the specified number of games is exhausted, one set is made based on the loop flag. Minute continuation will be triggered. When a lottery is won in the level-up lottery or when one set of continuation is activated based on the winning result of the loop lottery, the loop flag is discarded.

The [ART2, 5] loop lottery table defines the loop rate (A to D) to be referenced, the lottery result (non-winning. Win), and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. There is. For example, in the case of the loop rate A, a probability of 255/256 is non-winning, and a probability of 1/256 is winning. That is, by winning the lottery, the game is continued until the number of games in which ARTLv2 or RUSH is added to the prescribed number of games (20G, 3G) per set by one set is consumed. For example, the first level to enter in ART is set to ARTLv3, and when the ARTLv3 at the time of entering this ART is first demoted to ARTLv2, one set of continuation is performed by the loop lottery based on the loop rate according to the grade for the ARTLv2. On the other hand, similarly to this, when the first demotion to ARTLv2 is performed, the guaranteed loop number may be given by the guaranteed loop number lottery to which the above-described grade common initial is applied. According to this, even if the player is demoted to ARTLv2 without winning in the level-up lottery in ARTLv3, there is a possibility that the continuation or the guaranteed number of times of loop lottery will be given to the ARTLv2, so even after entering the ART. It is possible to effectively suppress the possibility of a so-called run-through, in which ART is terminated without continuing.

<Reel lock lottery table in PTR>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a PTR middle reel lock lottery table (setting 1) will be described. Note that, for the sake of convenience, only the table related to the setting 1 is shown in FIG. 72 as the PTR middle reel lock lottery table, but the table may have different contents for each set value, or may be one table common to each set value. ..

The reel lock lottery table during PTR is used for reel lock lottery for deciding whether or not to perform reel lock (reel lock 1 and 2 in ART 5) during ART 5, during PTR entry, or during BB winning. The reel lock lottery is not executed during ART preparation, special preparation preparation, PTR, RUSH, and BB (normal BB, special BB). The reel lock lottery is won in addition to the number of games in the additional lottery, and if the special lottery in addition is non-winning (when the additional lottery is performed), or in the additional lottery is added to the number of games and specialization is added. It is executed when the lottery is won in the lottery (when the special lottery is won). The reel lock lottery table in the PTR corresponds to each of the lottery results (non-winning, one-stage, two-stage), the reference target and the lottery result when the reference target is a lottery (when the winning is on-board, when the specialization is successful). The lottery value is specified. The first stage corresponds to "reel lock 1 in ART 5" shown in FIG. 36, and the second stage corresponds to "reel lock 2 in ART 5". For example, in the case of a special winning, the reel lock is not performed with a probability of 224/256 as a non-win, and the one-stage winning is achieved with a probability of 16/256 to perform "reel lock 1 in ART5". , 16/256, there is a two-stage winning, and "ART5 reel lock 2" is performed.

The tables and the table data shown in FIGS. 21 to 72 described above are stored in the main ROM 94, and are referred to when the main CPU 93 controls the gaming state and the payout state. On the other hand, the data of the tables shown in FIGS. 73 to 94 described below are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 and are referred to when the sub CPU 102 controls the effect state. 73 to 94 show various tables referred to in the chance zone (CZ, EXCZ) as an example. Tables used in production states other than the chance zone are also stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 and are referred to when the sub CPU 102 controls the production state. Are omitted for convenience.

<Definite CZ point sorting lottery table>
The confirmed CZ point allocation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In addition, (A) of the same figure shows a fixed CZ point sorting lottery table, and (B) of the same figure shows a point correspondence relation table related to the same table. When the “determined CZ” is determined by the CZ type lottery, the fixed CZ point sorting lottery table adds the special CZ points to the meter display points to be described later in the middle game of the CZ to increase the meter display points. It is used for the fixed CZ point sorting lottery for raising. The fixed CZ point sorting lottery table defines the CZ points (none, 100, 200, 300, 400) that are the lottery result and the lottery value corresponding to each lottery result.

As shown in (B) of FIG. 73, the technique points (0 to 20) described above are managed by the main CPU 93 that controls the payout state, while the sub CPU 102 is associated with the technique points and manages them in terms of performance. As points, in addition to the CZ points, there are battle points (0 to 400) and meter display points (0 to 500).

The battle point (0 to 400) is a parameter corresponding to the skill point (0 to 20) and accumulates a predetermined numerical value given according to the content of the effect (defeat the enemy character) to win the enemy character in the effect. And is managed by the sub CPU 102 as a parameter for changing the display color of the meter. For example, the battle points "0" to "99" correspond to the skill points "0" to "4", the meter display color is "blue", the battle points "100" to "199" are the skill points "5" to Corresponding to '9', the meter display color is "yellow", the battle points "200" to "299" are corresponding to skill points "10" to "14", the meter display color is "green", the battle point is "300". ~ '399' is the meter display color "red" corresponding to the skill points '15' to '19', and the competition point '400' is the meter display color "rainbow" corresponding to the skill point '20'. .. Regarding the competition point, when it exceeds "400", it is corrected to "400" as the upper limit value. Further, the predetermined numerical value given as the battle point is determined in advance according to the content of the effect of destroying the enemy character, which will be described later, such as the type and the type and the number of the enemy characters to compete with (not shown).

The meter display point (0 to 500) is a numerical value actually displayed on the meter according to the competition point, and is set as a limit value for each competition point. As shown in (B) of FIG. 73, for example, the battle points are “0” to “19”, “20” to “39”, “40” to “59”, “60” to “79”, and “80”. When it is'~' 99', the meter display color is'blue', and the meter display points are '35', '50', '65', '80', '85 based on the preset limit value. Is displayed as'. When the competition point reaches "400" (skill point "20"), the meter display color becomes "rainbow" and the meter display point is displayed as "500".

When the CZ points are added to the meter display points by the fixed CZ point sorting lottery, the meter display points are increased by a numerical value corresponding to the addition amount from the preset limit value. The upper limit of the meter display points is set to "500", and when the meter display points exceed "500" due to the addition of the CZ points, the meter display points are corrected to the upper limit of "500".

In this way, the meter display color changes each time the number of competition points increases by 100, and the meter display color changes each time the number of meter display points also increases by almost 100. Here, with respect to the meter display points, when the CZ points are added, it becomes a numerical value that greatly deviates from the competition point, and the situation may occur in which the meter display points dramatically increase but the meter display color does not change. Become. This gives the player the impression that the change in the meter display color has stopped halfway. When the meter display point is displayed as “500”, the display color of the meter becomes “rainbow”, which has the highest expectation, and therefore the expectation for ART transition is also increased.

Specifically, in the point management by the sub CPU 102, when the CZ point (none, 100, 200, 300, 400) is determined by the fixed CZ point sorting lottery, it is determined for the meter display point of the CZ8G. CZ points are added. As a result, the meter display points after the addition of CZ points are displayed according to the competition points of the 8th CZ. For example, in the CZ8G, in a normal case where the competition points are '80' to '99' and there is no CZ point addition, the meter display color is "blue" and "85" is displayed as the meter display point. In the special case where the CZ point “100” is added, the meter display color remains “blue” as usual, while “185” is displayed as the meter display point. According to the CZ point sorting lottery using such a fixed CZ point sorting lottery table, it is possible to give an impression that the display color change of the meter is temporarily stopped in the case of the fixed CZ, and the meter display points are displayed. It can be greatly changed, and the expectation for ART transition can be increased.

<CZ music lottery table>
The CZ music lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ music lottery table is provided for each set value and the number of games, but it may be one table common to each set value and the number of games. The CZ music lottery table is used for the music lottery for selecting the music to be reproduced during the CZ. The CZ song lottery table refers to the number of CZ stocks to be referenced (none, 1, 2, 3 or more), the song resulting from the lottery (normal CZ song, special CZ song), for each set value and number of games. The lottery value corresponding to each of the target and the lottery result is defined.

The music lottery is executed when the special CZ music is not reproduced at the start of the first CZ 1G based on the confirmed CZ or at the start of the second CZ 2-8G and when the number of skill points acquired is 20. For example, in the case of setting 1 and when the CZ1G start based on the confirmed CZ, when the number of CZ stocks is 1, the normal CZ song is selected with a probability of 13107/32768, and the special CZ song is selected with a probability of 19661/32768. The selected music is played from the intro. When the number of skill points is 20 at the start of the 2nd to 8th CZs, the special CZ song is selected with a probability of 9362/32768 regardless of the number of CZ stocks, and the special CZ song is selected. When selected, the music is played from the intro.

According to the music lottery using such a CZ music lottery table, when the “fixed CZ” is determined by the CZ type lottery described above, there is a possibility that the special CZ music is played at the start of the first CZ 1G and is played. It is possible to raise the degree of expectation for ART transition depending on the music being played. Also, in the CZ2 to 8G, if the skill point has reached the upper limit of 20, there is a possibility that the special CZ music will be played, and there is an expectation for the ART transition by the final game ART lottery of the CZ14G depending on the played music. You can increase the degree.

<CZ production category lottery table>
The CZ effect category lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the CZ effect category lottery table is provided for each of CZ1G, CZ2 to 10G, and CZ11G, as shown in FIGS. Further, the CZ effect category lottery table is provided for each predetermined number of difference points, which will be described later, but FIGS. 76 and 77 show only the tables corresponding to the difference points 0 to 4P for convenience. The difference point corresponds to a value obtained by subtracting the competition point from the meter display point. When the subtracted numerical value becomes a negative value, the difference point is corrected to 0 which is a predetermined lower limit value. When such a difference point becomes large, the deviation between the meter display point and the competition point becomes large. Also, the display color of the meter is always "blue" for the CZ1G eye, and changes from "blue" → "yellow" → "green" → "red" → "rainbow" according to the number of skill points acquired, The CZ effect category lottery tables of CZ2 to 10Gth and CZ11G shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 are provided so as to be different depending on the display color of the meter. The CZ effect category lottery table is provided as a table common to the settings 1 to 6, but may have different contents for each set value.

The CZ effect category lottery table is used for the effect category lottery for determining the effect category in the CZ. The CZ production category lottery table shows the winning combination (miss, lip, batting order bell, common bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak chee, strong chee, middle chee, BB1, BB2) that is the reference target, and a lottery result. The categories (no effect, enemy character destruction A, enemy character destruction B, aura notice, frame flash notice, shutter notice) and lottery values corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result are defined.

The enemy character destruction A and the enemy character destruction B are effect displays in which a predetermined enemy character appears in the display area 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the enemy character is destroyed in the A pattern or the B pattern. .. The aura notice is an effect display in which the aura appears on the main character who is fighting against the enemy character. The frame flash notice is an effect in which the frames of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R blink with LEDs. The shutter announcement is an effect in which a shutter (not shown) performs a predetermined opening operation stepwise. According to the CZ effect category lottery table, a frame flash notice or a shutter notice is likely to occur generally when a rare combination (watermelon, cherry) or a special combination (BB1, BB2, MB1, MB2) is won.

According to the effect category lottery using such a CZ effect category lottery table, it is possible to appropriately determine the predetermined effect contents according to the winning combination in the CZ1 to 11G eyes, and the enemy character (boss character) in the CZ14G eyes. By defeating the final game ART lottery, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for ART transition.

<Random lottery table doubling the competition points>
The competition point doubling lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 78. The competition point doubling lottery table is provided such that the difference points are different between less than 100 and 100 or more, and different between 2 to 8G and 9 to 11G.

The battle point doubling lottery table is used when "enemy character defeat A" or "enemy character defeat B" is determined in the production category lottery using the CZ production category lottery table (2 to 10 Gth and 11 Gth). It is used in the competition point doubling lottery for deciding whether to double the competition points that can be obtained accordingly. The battle point doubling lottery table shows the winning combination (Loss, Lip, Batting Bell, Common Bell, MB1, MB2, Watermelon, Weak Che, Strong Che, Middle Che, BB1, BB2) and lottery results (etc.). Doubling, doubling), and a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. For example, if the difference point is less than 100, and 9 to 11G, and "Enemy Character Defeat A" or "Enemy Character Defeat B" is determined by the watermelon winning, as a battle point corresponding thereto, with a probability of 6554/32768, etc. It is doubled but doubled with a probability of 26214/32768.

According to the competition point doubling lottery using such a competition point doubling lottery table, it is normal when the effect of defeating an enemy character is executed as the latter half of the CZ and as the difference points are relatively large. It is easier to get double the competition points, and as a result, if the difference between the competition points and the meter display points is large in the latter half of the CZ, it is easy to execute an effect that reduces the difference, and the game is played. The interest of can be raised.

<CZ enemy character defeat A content lottery table>
The CZ enemy character defeat A content lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 79. Note that the CZ enemy character defeat A content lottery table is provided so as to be different for each predetermined number of games, and is also provided for each predetermined number of difference points. Only the tables corresponding to the 2nd to 7th G at 0 to 4P are shown. Also, as with the CZ enemy character defeat A content lottery table shown in FIG. 79 and the like, a CZ enemy character defeat B content lottery table is provided, but for convenience, illustration of the CZ enemy character defeat B content lottery table is omitted. To do. Further, although a CZ enemy character defeat A content lottery table and a CZ enemy character defeat B content lottery table that are applied when the battle points are doubled are also provided, the illustration of these is also omitted for convenience.

The CZ enemy character defeat A content lottery table determines the effect contents when "enemy character defeat A" is determined by the effect category lottery using the CZ effect category lottery table (2 to 10G, 11G). Used for lottery A content defeat for enemy characters. CZ enemy character defeat A content lottery table, the winning combination to be referenced (Loss, Lip, Batting Bell, Common Bell, MB1, MB2, Watermelon, Weak Che, Strong Che, Middle Che, BB1, BB2), and lottery results And the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. For example, when the difference point is 0 to 4P on the 2nd to 7th G and BB1 is won and “enemy character defeat A” is determined, no. 20 "Enemy character defeat 4 Oo B" is decided. In addition, when the doubling of the competition points is determined by the competition point doubling lottery described above, the effect content is determined using the table corresponding to this. Furthermore, although not shown in the drawing, each effect content is associated with a battle point in advance, and when the effect content is determined, the corresponding battle point is added.

According to the enemy character destruction contents lottery using the CZ enemy character destruction contents lottery table, the number of CZ digestion games, the difference between the meter display points and the competition points (difference points), and the competition points are doubled. It is possible to finely determine the effect contents when destroying the enemy character depending on whether or not, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

<CZ aura winning lottery table>
The CZ aura acquisition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ aura acquisition lottery table is provided so as to be different for each predetermined number of games, and is provided for each predetermined number of difference points. However, in FIG. 80, the difference points are 0 to 19P for convenience. 20 to 39P, 40 to 59P, and only the tables corresponding to the 2nd to 7th eyes are shown.

The CZ aura acquisition lottery table determines the competition points to be given according to the "aura notice" when the "aura notice" is decided by the production category lottery using the CZ production category lottery table (2nd to 10th eyes and 11th eye). It is used for lottery to acquire aura. The CZ aura acquisition lottery table shows the winning combination (Loss, Lip, Batting Order Bell, Common Bell, MB1, MB2, Watermelon, Weak Che, Strong Che, Middle Che, BB1, BB2) that is the target of the lottery, and the winning result. The points (grant points: 0 to 200P) given as points and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result are defined. For example, when the difference point is 20 to 39P and the "aura notice" is determined on the 2nd to 7th g, 20P is always given as the battle point when the aura notice is rendered, regardless of which winning is won. It should be noted that the battle points given in advance of the aura notice will not be doubled.

According to the aura acquisition lottery using such a CZ aura acquisition lottery table, when the aura notice is displayed according to the number of CZ digestion games and the difference between the meter display points and the competition points (difference points). It is possible to finely determine the competition points to be given to, and to enhance the interest of the game.

<CZ aura content lottery table>
The CZ aura content lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 81. As shown in the figure, the CZ aura content lottery table is provided so as to be different for each battle point given along with the aura notice described above.

In the case of the CZ aura content lottery table, when the "aura notice" is determined by the production category lottery using the CZ production category lottery table (2nd to 10th eyes and the 11th eye), and the battle points given along with the aura notice are determined. In addition, it is used for the aura content lottery for determining the effect contents of the aura notice. The CZ aura content lottery table shows the winning combination (miss, rip, batting order bell, common bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak chee, strong chee, middle chee, BB1, BB2) to be referenced, and the lottery result frame. The effect contents related to the aura notice and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result are defined. For example, if the battle points given along with the aura notice are 20P or less, "special performance_point GET_small" is surely determined as the production content of the aura notice regardless of winning any winning combination.

According to the aura acquisition lottery using such a CZ aura content lottery table, it is possible to finely determine the content of the aura announcement according to the battle points given along with the aura announcement, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

<CZ production contents lottery (frame hula) table>
A CZ effect content lottery (frame hula) table will be described with reference to FIG. 82. The CZ effect content lottery (frame hula) table is the content of the frame flash notice when the "frame flash notice" is determined by the effect category lottery using the CZ effect category lottery table (2 to 10Gth and 11Gth). It is used for lottery of production contents to determine. The CZ effect content lottery (frame hula) table is a lottery to be referred to (Loose, Lip, Batting Bell, Common Bell, MB1, MB2, Watermelon, Weak Che, Strong Che, Middle Che, BB1, BB2) and lottery. The effect contents related to the resulting frame flash notice and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result are defined. For example, when a watermelon is won and a frame flash notice is determined, the probability of No. 4096/32768 is. "Reel frame_1on small_purple" of No. 7 is decided, and No. 7 has a probability of 28672/32768. 15 "reel frame_3on small_purple" is determined.

According to the effect content lottery using such a CZ effect content lottery (frame hula) table, it is possible to finely determine the effect content of the frame flash advance notice, and to enhance the interest of the game.

<CZ production content lottery (shutter) table>
The CZ effect content lottery (shutter) table will be described with reference to FIG. 83. The CZ effect content lottery (shutter) table determines the effect contents of the shutter advance notice when the “shutter advance notice” is determined by the effect category random determination using the CZ effect category lottery table (2 to 10 Gth and 11 Gth). It is used for lottery for production contents. CZ effect content lottery (shutter) table is a winning combination (Loss, Lip, Batting Bell, Common Bell, MB1, MB2, Watermelon, Weak Che, Strong Che, Middle Che, BB1, BB2) and lottery results. The content of the effect related to the shutter announcement and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result are defined. As the effect contents related to the shutter announcement, there is an effect operation in which a shutter (not shown) is opened in stages. For example, the shutter can be opened up to the third step where it is fully opened, and the shutter can be closed at a predetermined step. It is said that For example, if the watermelon is won and the shutter advance notice is determined, the probability is 24576/32768. “Shut_DEF_3on_CHANCE” of No. 3 is determined, and No. 3 has a probability of 8192/32768. 5, “Shut_DEF_1on red_CHANGE” is determined. A small window (not shown) formed of a liquid crystal panel or the like is provided behind the shutter, and an effect display is also displayed on the small window in conjunction with the stepwise opening/closing operation of the shutter.

According to the effect content lottery using such a CZ effect content lottery (shutter) table, it is possible to finely determine the effect content of the shutter advance notice, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

<CZ small window kel lottery table>
The CZ small window Kell lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ small window Kell lottery table is a small window for determining the effect contents using the shutter and the small window (not shown) according to the effect contents of the shutter announcement at the time of losing or replaying at the 1st to 11th Gs in the CZ. Used for Kell lottery. The CZ small window Kell lottery table is for the operation stage (0 to 3 stages) of the shutter as the reference target, the effect contents related to the display of the small window as the lottery result, and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. Is prescribed. For example, in the case of a loss, when the shutter operation stage opens and closes in the first stage, "No effect" is determined as the effect content of the small window with a probability of 30208/32768, and the effect content of the small window with a probability of 2048/32768. “Preliminary notice: 1st stage_2on failure” is determined, and “Preliminary notice: 1st stage_2on failure” is determined as the effect content of the small window with a probability of 512/32768.

According to the small window kel lottery using such a CZ small window kel lottery table, it is possible to finely determine the effect contents of the small window as well as the stepwise opening/closing operation of the shutter at the time of losing or replaying. Can be increased.

<CZ enemy appearance lottery table>
The CZ enemy appearance lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ enemy appearance lottery table is used in the enemy appearance lottery for determining the boss character (enemy character) to be the opponent in the 12th G of the CZ. In the enemy appearance lottery, the number of times of replay winning (0 to 3 times) and the operating state of the small window (not shown) (small window operating stage 0 to 3 (fully open) stage) are referred to. The CZ enemy appearance lottery table defines the number of times of winning of the replay as the reference target and the operation state of the small window, the effect contents as the lottery result, and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. For example, when the replay is won three times and the small window is in the 0-stage open state (fully closed state), “Month_Yellow: Enemy A” is determined as the effect content of the enemy appearance with a probability of 18432/32768, and 12288 With a probability of /32768, "Month_Yellow: Enemy B" is determined as the effect content of the enemy appearance, and with a probability of 2048/32768, "Month_Red: Enemy B" is determined as the effect content of the enemy appearance. In the present embodiment, the expectation of ART transition is set to be higher when "enemy B" appears than "enemy A".

According to the enemy appearance lottery using such a CZ enemy appearance lottery table, it is possible to determine the boss character (enemy character) who will be the final opponent in the CZ12G and the effect contents at the time of its appearance. Can be increased.

<CZ battle skill determination lottery table>
The CZ battle technique determination lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The CZ battle technique determination lottery table is provided for each meter display color (blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow). Further, although FIG. 86 shows only the CZ battle technique determination lottery table corresponding to the enemy character A for convenience, a CZ battle technique determination lottery table corresponding to the enemy character B is also provided.

The CZ battle technique determination lottery table is used for the battle technique determination lottery for determining the technique (no effect, techniques 1 to 5) to be delivered to the boss character (enemy character) at the 13th G in the CZ. In the CZ battle technique determination lottery table, each of the technique rank and the like to be referred to (technique ranks A to E, confirmed CZ), the technique to be the result of the lottery (no effect, technique 1 to 5), the reference target and the lottery result. The lottery value corresponding to is specified. For example, when the meter display color is “blue” and the skill rank is “D”, the type of battle technique to be delivered to the boss character is determined to be “technique 1” with a probability of 32480/32768, and the battle with a probability of 288/32768. The type of technique is determined to be “technique 2”.

According to the battle technique determination lottery using such a CZ battle technique determination lottery table, a technique corresponding to the meter display color and the technique rank is delivered to the boss character that finally appears, and the boss character is defeated to be ART. It can increase the expectation that it may move.

<CZ enemy judge lottery table>
The CZ enemy judge lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 87. Note that FIG. 87 shows only the CZ enemy judge lottery table corresponding to “enemy A” and “trick 1” for convenience, but “enemy A” and “trick 2 to 5” and “enemy B” and “trick”. A CZ enemy judge lottery table corresponding to "1 to 5" is also provided.

The CZ enemy judge lottery table is used in the enemy judge lottery for mainly determining the result (success, failure) of the battle with the boss character (enemy character) in the 14th game, which is the final game of the CZ. The CZ enemy judge lottery table corresponds to each of the reference lottery result (ART loss, per ART, per ART revival) to be referred to, the production content indicating success or failure to be the lottery result, and the reference target and lottery result. The lottery value is specified. When the ART lottery result is “ART lost”, the stock number (ST) of CZ is also referred to. Further, in the case of "per ART" as the ART lottery result, the ART grade (grades A to C) is also referred to. Furthermore, as the ART lottery result, "ART revival win" when the final game revival lottery is won may be referred to.

In the enemy judge lottery, for example, in the case of "per ART" and the ART grade is "grade A", the effect contents such as "success with one trick button" is determined with a probability of 24576/32768, and "problem with 8192/32768". The effect contents such as "Tech 1 fire button success" are determined.

According to the enemy judge lottery using such a CZ enemy judge lottery table, the contents of the performance showing the result of the battle depending on the number of CZ stocks and the ART grade are determined together with the result of the ART win, and the boss character depending on whether the ART lottery is successful or not. Since the effect related to the battle is executed, the interest of the game can be enhanced in the final game of CZ.

<CZ push button color lottery table>
The CZ push button color random determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 88. 88 shows only the CZ push button color random determination table corresponding to “enemy A” for convenience, a CZ push button color random determination table corresponding to “enemy B” is also provided.

The CZ push button color lottery table is used for the push button color lottery for determining the emission color of the push button when a push button (selection button) not shown appears in the 14th game, which is the final game of the CZ. The CZ push button color lottery table is used to determine the result of determination of the enemy judge lottery that is the reference target, the emission color (default, red, rainbow) of the push button that is the lottery result, and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. Is prescribed. For example, if "success without button 1 button" is determined by the enemy lottery, the display color of the push button is determined to be "default" with a probability of 16384/32768, and the display color of the push button is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. "Red" is decided.

According to the push button color lottery using such a CZ push button color lottery table, the emission color of the push button that indicates the result of the battle with the boss character is displayed on CZ14G, so that the game in the final game of CZ is performed. The interest of can be raised.

<EXCZ production category lottery table>
The EXCZ effect category lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 89. The EXCZ effect category lottery table is provided for each number of games (none, 3G, 5G, 7G) obtained by the game number addition lottery.

The EXCZ effect category lottery table is used for the effect category lottery for determining the effect category in each game from the first EXCZ game to the final game. The EXCZ production category lottery table has a common winning combination (miss, maintenance lip (RT2 maintenance lip), RT2 transition lip, RT2 middle lip, red bar W lip, red bar S lip, red fan lip, batting order bell, common for the EXCZ production category lottery table. Bell, MB1, MB2, Watermelon, Weak Che, Strong Che, Middle Che, BB1+Watermelon, BB1+Strong Che, BB1+Middle Che, BB2, and production categories that result in lottery (No production, aim cut-in, frame flash production) And a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. The "target cut-in" of the effect category is an effect that suggests a reverse push in order to promote the winning of the ART transition combination (red bar W rep, red bar S rep).

For example, when the number of games obtained by the number-of-games addition lottery is “none”, the effect category lottery related to EXCZ is executed in each of the EXCZ games 1 to 10G. According to this effect category lottery, the red bar W When winning the rip or the red bar S rip, "target cut-in" is definitely determined as the effect category, and the process shifts to ART.

According to the effect category lottery using the EXCZ effect category lottery table, it is possible to appropriately determine the predetermined effect content according to the winning combination in each game in EXCZ. For example, at the time of winning the ART transfer combination, It is possible to encourage the winning of the ART transition role by the production category “aiming cut-in” that suggests the reverse push, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

<EXCZ target contents lottery table>
The EXCZ aim content random determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 90.

The EXCZ aiming content lottery table is used in the aiming content lottery for determining the effect contents when the “target cut-in” is determined in the effect category randomization using the EXCZ effect category lottery table. The EXCZ target content lottery table is a common winning combination to be referred to (miss, maintenance rep (RT2 maintenance rip), RT2 transition rip, RT2 middle rip, red bar W rip, red bar S rip, red flutter lip, batting order bell, common Bell, MB1, MB2, Watermelon, Weak Che, Strong Che, Middle Che, BB1+Watermelon, BB1+Strong Che, BB1+Middle Che, BB2) and lottery results, reference objects and lottery results. The lottery value is specified. The contents of the effect include display of cut-in 1 (transformation) and display of loss or ART, display of cut-in 2 (grip of symbol) and display of loss or ART, and display of cut-in 3 (tech 5) and display of loss or ART. There is something like a display.

For example, when “Aim Cut-In” is determined by winning the red bar W Lip or the Red Bar S Lip, as the effect content of the “Aim Cut-In”, “ART” is displayed after displaying Cut-In 1 to 3. While the effect content to be displayed is always determined, the effect content to display "Loss" after the cut-in 1 or 2 is displayed is always determined at the time of a red-sharp lip win, and it does not shift to ART. Become.

According to the target content lottery using the EXCZ target content lottery table, the content of the effect can be appropriately determined depending on whether the ART is won or not, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<EXCZ frame hula contents lottery table>
The EXCZ frame hula content lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 91. The EXCZ effect category lottery table is provided for each of the number of games (none, 3G, 5G, 7G) obtained by the game number addition lottery, but in FIG. 91, the game obtained by the game number addition lottery. Only the table corresponding to the number "none" is shown.

The EXCZ frame hula content lottery table is used in the frame hula content lottery for determining the content of the effect when the "frame flash effect" is determined by the effect category lottery using the EXCZ effect category lottery table. The EXCZ frame hula content lottery table is used to refer to the winning combination (miss, maintenance lip (RT2 maintenance lip), RT2 transition lip, RT2 middle lip, red bar W lip, red bar S lip, red whirl lip, batting order bell, Common bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak check, strong check, middle check, BB1+watermelon, BB1+strong check, BB1+ middle check, BB2), and the contents of the effect related to the frame flash effect that is the lottery result, the reference target and the lottery. The lottery value corresponding to each of the results is defined. For example, if the frame flash effect is determined by winning the watermelon independently, the probability of No. 24576/32768 is No. “Reel frame_Rst small_white” of No. 1 is determined, and the probability of No. 1 is 8192/32768. “Reel frame_Rst small_purple” of 6 is determined.

According to the frame hula content lottery using such an EXCZ frame hula content lottery table, the content of the frame flash effect generated during the EXCZ can be finely determined, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. The frame flash effect in the final EXCZ game may be executed at the same time as the final twist effect described later. In the case of a loss in the final game of EXCZ, the frame flash effect is executed with a state in which the BGM fades out.

<Lottery table for the final EXCZ>
The EXCZ final agitation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The EXCZ final lottery table is provided for each game number (none, 3G, 5G, 7G) obtained by the game number addition lottery.

The EXCZ final drawing lottery table is used for the final drawing lottery for determining the content of the effect display that fants per ART or per ART revival in the final game according to the number of EXCZ added games. The EXCZ final drawing lottery table is a common winning combination to be referred to (miss, maintenance lip (RT2 maintenance lip), RT2 transition lip, RT2 middle lip, red bar W lip, red bar S lip, red whirl lip, batting order bell, common Bell, MB1, MB2, Watermelon, Weak Che, Strong Che, Middle Che, BB1+Watermelon, BB1+Strong Che, BB1+Middle Che, BB2) and lottery results, reference objects and lottery results. The lottery value is specified. The effect contents include no effect, dimming 1, dimming 2 (revival), dimming 3 (revival), and dimming 3 (end).

According to the final drawing lottery using the EXCZ final drawing lottery table, it is possible to perform an effect such that the expectation of ART rush is increased in the final game of EXCZ. It should be noted that the effect (inclination effect) that incites the ART hit in the final game of EXCZ may be executed at the same time as the frame flash effect. In the case of a loss in the final game of EXCZ, the flairing effect is executed together with a state in which BGM fades out.

<EXCZ Navi type lottery table>
The EXCZ navigation type random determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 93.

The EXCZ navigation type lottery table is referred to when the sub CPU 102 receives a command instructing the pressing order from the main CPU 93 during EXCZ, and is used for the navigation type lottery for determining the type of navigation effect under the control of the sub CPU 102. .. The EXCZ navigation type lottery table has a common winning combination to be referred to (miss, maintenance lip (RT2 maintenance lip), RT2 transition lip, RT2 middle lip, red bar W lip, red bar S lip, red fan lip, batting order bell, common Bell, MB1, MB2, Watermelon, Weak Che, Strong Che, Medium Che, BB1+ Watermelon, BB1+ Strong Che, BB1+ Middle Che, BB2), and the type of navigation in the EXCZ that is the lottery result, the reference target and the lottery result. The lottery value corresponding to is specified.

According to the navigation type random determination using the EXCZ navigation type random determination table, the type of navigation instruction under the control of the main CPU 93 can be appropriately determined even during the EXCZ.

<EXCZ pseudo-navi push order lottery table>
The EXCZ pseudo-navi push order lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 94.

The EXCZ pseudo-navi push order lottery is a pseudo-navi push-order lottery for determining the push-order notification content by the liquid crystal display device 11 when a navigation type other than “no navigation” is determined by the navigation type lottery during EXCZ. Used. The EXCZ pseudo-navi push-order lottery table is used to refer to the winning combination (miss, maintenance lip (RT2 maintenance lip), RT2 transition lip, RT2 middle lip, red bar W lip, red bar S lip, red shirring lip, batting order bell. , Common bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak Che, strong Che, middle Che, BB1+ watermelon, BB1+Strong Che, BB1+ middle Che, BB2), and the type of push order notification content that is the lottery result, the reference target and the lottery. The lottery value corresponding to each of the results is defined.

According to the pseudo-navi push-order lottery using the EXCZ pseudo-navi push-order lottery table, for example, when the maintenance lip (RT2 maintenance lip) is won, the push-order notification content which is a correct answer to the push-order with a probability of approximately 1/3 is provided. If RT2 is maintained according to the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the push order notification content, the push order notification content at which the push order fails with a probability of approximately 2/3 is determined and complied with. There is a possibility that it will shift to RT0. That is, according to the pseudo-navi push order lottery, the stop operation according to the determined push order notification content does not necessarily become the push order correct answer, and RT2 can be maintained without following the push order notification. Even if the push order notification is made, the process may shift to RT0, so that it is possible to realize the pseudo push order notification by the sub CPU 102 different from the navigation instruction by the main CPU 93 in the true ART.

<Processing executed on the pachi-slot machine>
Next, the processing executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 and the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Main control processing by control of main CPU>
Main control processing executed by the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 95, when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the main control process is executed, and the main CPU 93 performs the initialization process when the power is turned on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup was performed normally or the setting was changed appropriately, and the memory area, device, etc. are initialized according to the determination result.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the end of the unit game (game) (S2). In this processing, the data in various designated storage areas in the main RAM 95 are cleared. The designated storage area is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S3). In this processing, the input of the medal sensor 46 and the start switch 64 is checked.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this processing, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table (see FIG. 28 and FIG. 29) according to the set value and the game state, and determines the internal winning combination from the plurality of winning combinations by random determination. In the internal lottery process of S4, when BB1 is determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 93 sets the data corresponding to the carryover combination storing area of the main RAM 95, and turns on the RT4 flag as a flag indicating the gaming state. And the game state is set to RT4 (BB1) and the process is executed. When BB2 is determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 93 sets the data corresponding to the carryover combination storing area of the main RAM 95, and also sets the RT5 flag to ON as a flag indicating the gaming state to set the gaming state. The process is executed as RT5 (BB2). The RT4 flag and the RT5 flag are turned on until the data in the carryover combination storing area is cleared, that is, until the symbol combination corresponding to each of BB1 and BB2 is displayed, and the symbol combination related to BB1 and BB2 is displayed. When the data in the carryover combination storing area is cleared by doing so, it is set to OFF.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets a winning combination command corresponding to the internal winning combination in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95 (S5). The winning combination command is transmitted to the sub control board 42 together with other commands by a start command transmission process described later, and is also used as an argument in a game lock control process, a payout state control process, etc. described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes game lock control processing (S6). In this process, a BB2 freeze 1 (see FIG. 36) is generated based on a flag indicating a payout state (ball payout state flag) and a winning combination command, and a BB2 win 1 (see FIG. 36) is generated when there is a BB2 win other than ART5 or during ART preparation. BB2 freeze 2 (see FIG. 36) is generated when there is a BB2 winning except during the preparation for the inside ART. Further, in the game lock control process, in the BB end process (see S192 of FIG. 105) of the BB check process described later, the game lock (see FIG. 36) associated with the end of BB1 or BB2 should be executed in the next unit game. Even when the flag is set, the game lock is generated based on this flag. In other cases, the main CPU 93 skips the process of S6 and executes the next process. Note that the same processing as the game lock control processing in S6 may be executed in various start processings (see FIG. 96) of the payout state control processing described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs payout state control processing (S7). In this process, various processes related to the payout state are executed. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs main side navigation instruction control processing (S8). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is ART based on the payout state flag, and if it is ART, a command including a navigation number (see FIG. 31) corresponding to a winning combination or the like is stored in the main RAM 95. Set in a predetermined area. The command including the navigation number is transmitted to the sub-control board 42 together with other commands by the start command transmission process described later, and is used in the sub-side navigation effect control process described later (see FIG. 112).

Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel stop initialization processing (S9). In this processing, a reel stop control pattern used for stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined according to the winning combination and the game state. The reel stop control pattern is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95 and is used in a reel stop control process (see FIG. 104) described later. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs start command transmission processing (S10). In this process, various commands set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95 at the start of the unit game are transmitted to the sub control board 42. The commands transmitted at the start include a winning combination command, a navigation command, and a command indicating a payout state.

Next, the main CPU 93 carries out so-called wait processing and then carries out reel rotation start processing (S11). In this process, rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started. When all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start rotating, an interrupt process is executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), so that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are accelerated until their rotation speed reaches a predetermined speed. The reels 3L, 3C, 3R are controlled so that the predetermined speed is maintained thereafter.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel stop control processing (S12). In this processing, based on the reel stop control pattern determined in S9, the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are respectively pressed in accordance with the timings when the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R are pressed. The rotation is stopped and controlled. In the reel stop control pattern, the priority order of the stop symbols according to the pressing order of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is defined, and according to the reel stop control pattern, the same symbol position in the case of the same winning combination. Even if each stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed at the timing, if the pressing order is different, stop control is performed so that the stop symbols are different. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a prize determination medal payout process (S13). In this process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R being stopped, based on the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination such as payout of medal or operation of re-play is given. The operation for giving is controlled.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this processing, a winning operation command is generated according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed, and this winning operation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 42. The winning operation command includes various information indicating a combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a BB check process (S15). In this process, the operation and the end of BB1 or BB2 as the game state and the payout state are controlled based on the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed. This processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs MB check processing (S16). In this process, the operation and the end of MB1 or MB2 as the game state are controlled based on the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT check processing (S17). In this process, control is performed to shift RT as a game state based on a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a payout state check process (S18). In this process, control is performed to shift the payout state based on the winning combination (group combination) determined in S4, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 returns to the process of S2. The payout state check process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<ball output state control processing>
Next, the payout state control process will be described with reference to FIG. 96.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the payout state control process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the normal state (in the normal state) based on the payout state flag (S20). If it is normal (S20: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S21. When it is not normal (S20: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S22.

In S21, the main CPU 93 performs a normal start process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state control process.

In S22, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not CZ is in progress based on the payout state flag. When in CZ (S22: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S23. When not in CZ (S22: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S24.

In S23, the main CPU 93 performs a CZ start time process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state control process.

In S24, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not EXCZ is in progress based on the payout state flag. When the EXCZ is being performed (S24: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S25. When not in the EXCZ (S24: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S26.

In S25, the main CPU 93 executes processing during the start during EXCZ. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state control process.

In S26, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not ART is in progress based on the payout state flag. When it is in ART (S26: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S27. When it is not in ART (S26: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S28.

In S27, the main CPU 93 performs a start-time process during ART. This processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state control process.

In S28, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART is being prepared based on the payout state flag. When the ART is being prepared (S28: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S29. When the ART preparation is not in progress (S28: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S30.

In S29, the main CPU 93 performs a start-up process during ART preparation. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state control process.

In S30, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the normal BB is in progress based on the payout state flag. When it is in the normal BB (S30: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S31. When it is not in the normal BB (S30: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S32.

In S31, the main CPU 93 performs a start-time process during BB1 (normal BB). In this processing, processing such as counting the number of games required for starting a unit game during BB1 (normal BB) operation and checking a flag is performed. In addition, in this process, additional lottery B and ART lottery regarding the number of ART games are performed based on the group combination. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state control process.

In S32, the main CPU 93 executes a process at the time of starting during BB2 (special BB). In this processing, processing such as counting the number of games required to start a unit game during BB2 (special BB) operation and checking a flag is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state control process.

<Normal start processing>
Next, the normal start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the normal start processing, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of games between ARTs is 1000 G or more (S40). The number of games between ARTs is the number of games counted by the main CPU 93 from the end of ART to the next ART winning or BB winning. In the present embodiment, the so-called ceiling game number, which is the upper limit of the number of games between ARTs, is set to 1000G, and it is determined whether or not the number of games between ARTs has reached the number of ceiling games. When the number of games between ARTs is 1000 G or more (S40: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S52. When the number of games between ARTs is less than 1000G (S40:YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S41.

In S41, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a BB (BB1 or BB2) winning based on the winning combination. When the winning is BB (S41: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S45. When it is not BB winning (S41: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S42.

In S42, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a middle-tier cherry winning in the MB based on the game state flag and the winning combination. When it is the middle-stage cherry winning in the MB (S42: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S45. When it is not the middle cherry winning in the MB (S42: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S43.

In S43, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the transition time point of the CZ lottery state. The transition time point of the CZ lottery state means a time point when the counted number of games between ARTs corresponds to the cycle A, the cycle B, or the special cycle (see FIG. 40). When it is the time of shifting to the CZ lottery state (S43: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S44. When it is not the time to shift to the CZ lottery state (S43: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S45.

In S44, the main CPU 93 performs a CZ lottery state transition lottery process. In this process, the CZ lottery state transition lottery is executed using the table of FIG. As a result, the CZ lottery state may shift to any of "LOW", "MIDDLE", and "HIGH". When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S45.

In S45, the main CPU 93 performs an ISM mode transition lottery process. In this process, the ISM mode transition lottery is executed based on the ISM mode currently staying and the winning combination (group combination) using the table of FIG. As a result, the ISM mode may shift to any of "normal", "high accuracy", and "ultra high accuracy". The ISM mode after the transition is applied to the next game. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S46.

In S46, the main CPU 93 executes an ISM acquisition lottery process. In this process, the ISM acquisition lottery is executed based on the ISM mode in which the user is currently staying and the winning combination (group combination) using the table of FIG. This may earn ISM points. Upon completion of this process, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S47.

In S47, the main CPU 93 performs a CZ lottery process. In this process, the CZ lottery is executed according to the CZ lottery state determined in S44 using the table of FIG. As a result, the payout state may shift from the normal state to CZ or EXCZ. The CZ lottery is not executed unless the ISM point is at least 1. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S48.

In S48, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the result of S47 is a CZ winning. When it is a CZ winning (S48: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S49. When it is not the CZ winning (S48: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S50.

In S49, the main CPU 93 performs a precursor game number lottery process. In this process, the precursor game number lottery that suggests a CZ transition is executed at the time of winning the CZ or releasing the CZ stock by using the precursor game number lottery table of FIG. When the number of precursor games determined as the result of the lottery is exhausted, the game shifts to CZ or EXCZ. In addition, if the CZ lottery process of S47 is performed during the CZ omen, and a plurality of CZ winnings are stocked before the CZ transition, the omen game number lottery is performed again after the end of CZ or ART, and the lottery is determined by this lottery. After the number of games played is changed to CZ or EXCZ again. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S50.

In S50, the main CPU 93 performs ART lottery processing. In this processing, ART lottery is executed using the ART lottery table of FIG. 42. The ART lottery process of S50 satisfies the conditions that the ISM point is 0, the CZ lottery state is “HIGH”, the CZ sign is in the sign or the non-ART sign is in place, and the bell is in the lottery. Only executed if. According to the ART lottery process of S50, the payout state may shift from the normal state to ART2 (ARTLv2) without passing through CZ and EXCZ. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S51.

In S51, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is an ART winning or not based on the processing result of S50 and the determination results of S41 and S42. As a result of the determination in S41 and S42, BB (BB1 or BB2) is won, and in the case of middle-tier cherry winning in MB, ART is won. When it is an ART winning (S51: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S52. When it is not the ART winning (S51: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the normal start processing.

In S52, the main CPU 93 performs ART transfer processing. In this process, the number of precursor games before the shift to ART is set, or the number of games between ARTs is reset. The payout state may shift from the normal state to ART2 (ARTLv2) after the number of precursor games set in this way. For example, when the number of games between ARTs reaches 1000G and the game is transferred to ART, the number of precursor games of ART is set to 1G in the ART transfer process. Further, in the ART transfer processing, ART grade lottery for determining the ART grade using the table of FIG. 68 is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the normal start process.

<Processing during CZ start>
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the processing at the time of CZ start will be described.

As shown in FIG. 98, in the CZ start processing, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of games between ARTs is 1000 G or more (S60). When the number of games between ARTs is 1000 G or more (S60: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S74. When the number of games between ARTs is less than 1000G (S60: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S61.
(S60).

In S61, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a BB (BB1 or BB2) winning based on the winning combination. When the winning is BB (S61: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S74. When it is not BB winning (S61: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S62.

In S62, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a middle-tier cherry winning in the MB in the ART sign based on the game state flag, the winning combination, and the like. When it is the middle-stage cherry winning in the MB (S62: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S74. When it is not the middle cherry winning in the MB (S62: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S63.

In S63, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the payout state is the first game of CZ. If it is the first game of CZ (S63: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S64. When it is not the first game of CZ (S63: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S68.

In S64, the main CPU 93 performs a CZ activation game lock process. According to this processing, the game lock is generated at the start of the 1st G of the CZ (see FIG. 36). When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S65.

In S65, the main CPU 93 performs a CZ type lottery process. In this processing, based on the CZ lottery state using the table of FIG. 43, "confirmed CZ" in which the effect for CZ is determined after the ART transfer is confirmed, or the final game ART lottery processing in S72 described later is performed. The CZ type lottery for determining the “normal CZ” in which the normal effect is performed is not executed. When "confirmed CZ" is determined as the result of the lottery, the ART winning is forcibly made in the final game ART lottery process of S72. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S66.

In S66, the main CPU 93 executes a boss lottery process. In this processing, the condition for causing a specific boss character (specific boss) to appear on CZ14G using the table of FIG. 44 (the number of winnings of the group role “Replay” in the CZ2 to 11G (replay winning count) is 3 to 0 times. The boss lottery for determining) is executed. For example, when “3 times” is determined as the result of the lottery, if the number of replay wins of the CZ2 to 11G is 3 or more, the appearance of a specific boss character (specific boss) is confirmed, and the replay win of the CZ2 to 11G is confirmed. If the number of times is less than 3, the normal boss character (normal boss) appears. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S67.

In S67, the main CPU 93 performs a technique point lottery process. In this process, the technique point lottery for determining the technique point based on the group combination is executed using the table of FIG. The technique points are accumulated from CZ1 to 13G and used as parameters for determining the technique ranks A to E. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S68.

In S68, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the payout state is one of the 2nd to 13th games of CZ. When the game is one of the 2nd to 13th games of CZ (S68: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S69. When it is not any of the 2nd to 13th games of CZ (S68: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S70.

In S69, the main CPU 93 performs a technique point lottery process, similar to the process of S67. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S70.

In S70, the main CPU 93 executes final game ART lottery processing. In this process, using the table of FIG. 46 at the start of the 14th CZ, based on the technique ranks A to E corresponding to the boss character (normal boss or specific boss) to appear and the technique points up to the 13th CZ, it is determined whether or not to shift to ART. The final game ART lottery for determining whether or not is executed. In addition, when "confirmed CZ" is determined by the process of S65, the result of the final game ART lottery is forced to be ART winning. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S71.

In S71, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is an ART winning based on the processing result of S70. When the winning is ART (S71: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S74. When it is not the ART winning (S71: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S72.

In S72, the main CPU 93 executes a final game revival lottery process. In this processing, even if the processing result of S70 is not an ART winning, a final game revival for determining whether or not to be an ART winning with a revival effect based on a group combination using the table of FIG. The lottery is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S73.

In S73, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is an ART winning based on the processing result of S72. When the winning is ART (S73: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S74. When it is not the ART winning (S73: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the CZ start time process.

In S74, the main CPU 93 performs ART transfer processing. In this process, ART2 (ARTLv2) is set as the payout state of the next game, or the number of games between ARTs is reset. Further, in the ART transfer processing, ART grade lottery for determining the ART grade using the table of FIG. 68 is executed. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 ends the CZ start processing.

<Processing during start during EXCZ>
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the processing at the time of starting during EXCZ will be described.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the EXCZ start process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of games between ARTs is 1000 G or more (S80). When the number of games between ARTs is 1000 G or more (S80: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S83. When the number of games between ARTs is less than 1000G (S80:NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S81.

In S81, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a BB (BB1 or BB2) winning based on the winning combination. When the winning is BB (S81: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S83. When it is not the BB winning (S81: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S82.

In S82, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a middle-tier cherry winning in the MB based on the game state flag and the winning combination. When it is the middle-stage cherry winning in the MB (S82: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S83. When it is not the middle cherry winning in the MB (S82: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S84.

In S83, the main CPU 93 performs ART transfer processing. In this process, ART4 (ARTLv4) is set as the payout state of the next game, or the number of games between ARTs is reset. Further, in the ART transfer processing, ART grade lottery for determining the ART grade using the table of FIG. 68 is executed. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 ends the EXCZ start processing.

In S84, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the payout state is the first EXCZ game. When it is the first game of EXCZ (S84: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S85. When it is not the first game of EXCZ (S84: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S86.

In S85, the main CPU 93 performs a game lock process when EXCZ is activated. According to this processing, the game lock is generated at the start of the 1st G of the EXCZ (see FIG. 36). Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S86.

In S86, the main CPU 93 executes a game number addition lottery process. In this process, a game number addition lottery is executed for determining the number of games to be added as the EXCZ game number based on the group combination using the table of FIG. As a result, in EXCZ, the number of games is extended according to the group combination. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 ends the EXCZ start processing.

<Processing at start during ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, the process at the start during ART will be described.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the ART start processing, the main CPU 93 determines whether the state is one of ARTs 1 to 4 based on the payout state flag (S90). When it is one of ART1 to 4 (S90: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S91. When none of ART1 to ART4 (S90: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S98.

In S91, the main CPU 93 performs a level-up lottery process. In this processing, level-up lottery for determining promotion/demotion of ARTs 1 to 4 is executed based on the group combination using the tables shown in FIGS. 49 to 53 corresponding to the ART level. According to this processing, the promotion destination/remotion destination after the predetermined number of games (20G, etc.) has been exhausted in each stage of ART 1 to 4 is determined. If the promotion is decided twice or more before the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the current ART level is promoted to two or more levels. The predetermined number of games is 40G or more when the game is continued by the lottery in the loop lottery or the lottery in the loop guaranteed number lottery. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S92.

In S92, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is a level up winning (promotion) as the processing result of S91. When it is a level up winning (S92: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S93. When it is not the level up winning (S92: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S94.

In S93, the main CPU 93 stocks information relating to promotion until the predetermined number of games (20G, etc.) is exhausted. If there is information related to promotion two or more times, the information related to stock is deleted once for each promotion. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S94.

In S94, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the start time of ART2 based on the payout information. When it is the start time of ART2 (S94: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S95. When the ART2 is not started (S94: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S96.

In S95, the main CPU 93 performs a lottery process related to the loop. In this process, the loop guaranteed number lottery using the table of FIG. 54, the loop rate lottery using the table of FIG. 70, and the loop lottery using the table of FIG. 71 are executed. When the winning is finally won by the loop lottery, the loop flag is set to ON. For example, even if you were not able to be promoted by the time you exhausted the specified number of games (20G) in ARTLv2, if the loop flag is on, one set of 20G will be added and continue until ARTLv2 has exhausted the 40th game. Becomes In addition, even if the loop flag is not turned on and it is not possible to be promoted until the prescribed number of games (20G) is exhausted in ARTLv2, if the number of guaranteed loops is one or more, the number of games for one set or more Is further added, and as a general rule, ARTLv2 continues until the number of games for the added set is consumed. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 ends the ART start processing.

In S96, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the start time of the ART 4 based on the payout information. When it is the start time of ART4 (S96: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S97. When it is not the start time of ART2 (S96: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the start time process during ART.

In S97, the main CPU 93 performs a winning reward lottery process. In this process, in order to prepare for the case of shifting to ARTLv5, the winning reward lottery is executed using the table of FIG. 55 in order to determine the type of PTR as the winning reward of the battle effect in advance. If the player is demoted in ART4 and does not move to ART5, the effect of winning in the battle effect is not executed and the PTR type determined in the winning reward lottery is discarded. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 ends the ART start processing.

In S98, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the state is ART5 based on the payout information. When it is in the ART 5 state (S98: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S99. When it is not in the ART 5 state (S98: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S106 shown in FIG.

In S99, the main CPU 93 executes the addition state transition lottery process. In this processing, the additional state transition lottery for determining the additional state (normal, high-accuracy, ultra-high-accuracy) based on the group combination using the table of FIG. 56 is executed. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S100.

In S100, the main CPU 93 performs the additional lottery A process. In this processing, the additional lottery A for determining the additional game number lottery table (Tables 1 to 7) shown in FIG. 62 based on a predetermined group combination or BB1 winning is executed using the table of FIG. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S101.

In S101, the main CPU 93 performs the additional game number lottery process. In this process, the additional game number lottery for determining the additional game number in ART5 is executed by using the additional game number lottery table (see FIG. 62) determined in the process of S100. The number of additional games determined here is added as the number of ART5 games. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S102.

In S102, the main CPU 93 executes the additional specialized stock lottery A processing. In this process, when the winning result is obtained in the process of S100, the additional special stock lottery A for activating "RUSH" or "PTR" is executed based on the group combination using the table of FIG. .. When a winning result indicating that "RUSH" or "PTR" is activated is obtained, information corresponding to the winning result is stocked, and "RUSH" or "PTR" is stored based on the information stocked after the number of games of ART5 is exhausted. ", and information related to stock is erased. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S103.

In S103, the main CPU 93 performs a PTR type lottery process. In this process, the PTR type lottery for selecting one of PTR1 to 3 using the table of FIG. 67 is executed. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S104.

In S104, the main CPU 93 performs a RUSH predictive game number lottery process. In this process, when the information indicating that "RUSH" is activated is stocked as the process result of S102, the precursor game number lottery that suggests the shift to RUSH is executed using the precursor game number random determination table of FIG. When the number of precursor games determined as the result of the lottery is exhausted, the game shifts to RUSH. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S105.

In S105, the main CPU 93 performs reel lock lottery processing. In this processing, when the addition is determined by determining the additional game number lottery table (tables 1 to 7) as the processing result of S100, or "RUSH" or "PTR" is activated as the processing result of S102. If the winning result is obtained, reel lock is generated at the start of the game (see FIG. 36). When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 ends the ART start processing.

As shown in FIG. 101, in S106, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not specialization preparation is being performed based on the payout state flag. In the case of specialization preparation (S106: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S107. When it is not specialization preparation (S106: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S109.

In S107, the main CPU 93 performs a PTR type lottery process. In this process, the information indicating that the "PTR" is activated is stocked as the processing result of S102, and when the "PTR" is activated based on the stocked information, PTR1 to PTR3 are used by using the table of FIG. The PTR type lottery for selecting any of the above is executed during the specialization preparation. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 ends the ART start processing.

In S108, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a PTR based on the payout state flag. When it is the PTR (S108: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S109. When it is not the PTR (S108: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S114.

In S109, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning of the group combination “Replay” (replay winning) has continued 10 times in the PTR2. When the replay winning is consecutive 10 times during the PTR2 (S109: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S110. When it does not correspond to 10 consecutive replay wins in PTR2 (S109: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S111.

In S110, the main CPU 93 performs a special addition lottery process. In this processing, the special additional lottery for determining the additional game number lottery table (tables 1 to 7) shown in FIG. 62 is executed using the table of FIG. 61. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S112.

In S111, the main CPU 93 performs an additional lottery B process. In this process, when the winning combination corresponds to the "SP REP" or "WSP REP" of the group combination, the additional game number lottery table (Tables 1 to 7) shown in FIG. 62 is determined using the table of FIG. 60. The additional lottery B is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S112.

In S112, the main CPU 93 performs the additional game number lottery process. In this process, the additional game number lottery for determining the additional game number of ART5 during the PTR is executed by using the additional game number lottery table (see FIG. 62) determined in the process of S110 or S111. The number of additional games determined here is added as the number of ART5 games after the PTR ends. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S113.

In S113, the main CPU 93 performs reel lock lottery processing. In this process, when the PTR enters the game and if the additional lottery B in S111 results in additional winning, reel lock (reel lock 1 in ART5) is generated at the start of the game (see FIG. 36). When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 ends the ART start processing.

In S114, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is the RUSH start time based on the payout state flag. When the RUSH is started (S114: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S115. When the RUSH is not started (S114: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S116.

In S115, the main CPU 93 performs a loop determination process. In this process, the loop rate lottery is executed using the table of FIG. 70, and the loop lottery is executed using the table of FIG. 71. That is, at the start of RUSH, it is determined whether or not a plurality of sets of effects related to one set of 3G RUSH are executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S116.

In S116, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not RUSH is in progress based on the payout state flag. When it is in RUSH (S116: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S117. When it is not in the RUSH state (S116: NO), the main CPU 93 terminates the ART start process.

In S117, the main CPU 93 performs an additional lottery B process. In this process, similar to the process of S111, when the winning combination corresponds to the “SP REP” or “WSP REP” of the group combination, the additional game number lottery table (Table 1 shown in FIG. 62 is used by using the table of FIG. 60. The additional lottery B for determining ~7) is executed. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S118.

In S118, the main CPU 93 performs the additional game number lottery process. In this process, the additional game number lottery for determining the additional game number of ART5 during RUSH is executed by using the additional game number lottery table already determined in the process of S100 in ART5. The number of additional games determined here is added as the number of ART5 games after the end of RUSH. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 ends the ART start processing. In the third game, which is the final game of RUSH, loop lottery is also executed using the table of FIG. 71, and it is determined whether or not the effects related to RUSH are executed as a continuous set.

<Starting process during ART preparation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the ART preparatory start processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the ART preparatory start process, the main CPU 93 executes the addition state transition lottery process (S120). In this process, the addition state transition lottery for determining the addition state (normal, high-accuracy, ultra-high-accuracy) based on the winning combination using the table of FIG. 56 is executed. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S121.

In S121, the main CPU 93 performs the additional lottery A process. In this processing, the additional lottery A for determining the additional game number lottery table (tables 1 to 7) shown in FIG. 62 based on the group combination using the table of FIG. 57 is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S122.

In S122, the main CPU 93 performs the additional game number lottery process. In this process, the additional game number lottery for determining the additional game number in ART5 is executed by using the additional game number lottery table (see FIG. 62) determined in the process of S121. The number of additional games determined here is added as the number of games at the start of ART5. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the ART preparatory start process. It should be noted that in the ART preparation start time process in which BB1 is won during ART1 to 4, waiting for RT2 transition after BB1 is completed, and transitioning to ART1 to 4 is performed, level-up lottery is performed instead of additional lottery. If you win this level-up lottery, you will move to the ART level that has been promoted to the next level.

<Reel stop initial setting processing>
Next, the reel stop initialization process will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the reel stop initialization process, the main CPU 93 refers to a spinner stop initialization table (not shown) and acquires a spinner stop number based on a winning combination or the like (S150). When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S151.

In S151, the main CPU 93 acquires various kinds of information based on the turning cylinder stop number and the like. In this process, for example, various kinds of information such as determination data for each pressing order associated with the number for turning cylinder stop is acquired. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S152.

In S152, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area of the main RAM 95. That is, the main CPU 93 sets the bits of all the symbol code storage areas (excluding unused areas) of the main RAM 95 to "1". When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S153.

In S153, the main CPU 93 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initialization process. The stop button non-operation counter is for determining the number of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R that are not stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95.

<Reel stop control processing>
Next, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the reel stop control process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S160). When the valid stop button is pressed (S160: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S161. When the valid stop button has not been pressed (S160: NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the processing of S160 until the valid stop button is pressed.

In S161, the main CPU 93 updates the pressing order storage area (not shown) and the operation stop button storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 95 according to the pressed stop button. That is, the main CPU 93 manages the type of the stop button that has been pressed by updating the operation stop button storage area, and also updates the pressing order storage area based on the type and order of the stop button that has been pressed. By doing so, the order of stop operations (push order, batting order) is managed. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S162.

In S162, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button inoperative counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S163.

In S163, the main CPU 93 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S164.

In S164, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter. The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch board 65. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S165.

In S165, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process. In this process, the number of sliding pieces defined at the stop start position is determined based on reel stop control information (stop table group) selected based on a winning combination from a spinning cylinder stop initialization table (not shown). .. According to such a process, it is possible to make the symbols drawn into the predetermined stop position different according to the pushing order of the internal winning combination and the stop operation. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S166.

In S166, the main CPU 93 performs reel stop command generation processing. In this process, reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 41 to the sub control board 42 is generated, and this reel stop command data is stored in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95. The reel stop command data is data indicating the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S167.

In S167, the main CPU 93 determines the planned stop position based on the stop start position and the sliding piece number determination data, and stores the planned stop position in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. The planned stop position is a symbol position in which any one of the predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” corresponding to the number of sliding pieces is added to the stop start position, and is a symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. .. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S168.

In S168, the main CPU 93 sets the planned stop position as a search symbol position in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S169.

In S169, the main CPU 93 performs a symbol code storage process. In this processing, the symbol code of the checking symbol position data for checking the symbol position of the spinning reel is acquired. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S170.

In S170, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area of the main RAM 95 based on the symbol code acquired in the process of S169. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S171.

In S171, the main CPU 93 performs control change processing. In this process, the stop information group used to stop the reels is updated when the reel is at the specific stop position. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S172.

In S172, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released. When the pressed stop button is released (S172: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S173. If the pressed stop button has not been released yet (S172: NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of S172 until the release is released.

In S173, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S174.

In S174, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0. When the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S174: YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process. When the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (S174: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S175.

In S175, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority storage process. In this process, the drawing priority order of all the symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R that are rotating is determined. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 returns to the process of S160. According to such reel stop control processing, the symbols or the display constituting the display combination are displayed according to the internal winning combination and the pressing order of the stop operation, and the timing of the stop operation so as to form the stop pattern shown in FIG. The symbols that do not form a winning combination are preferentially drawn to a predetermined stop position, and the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed along the winning determination line is changed.

<BB check process>
Next, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106.

As shown in FIG. 105, in the BB check process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in BB1 based on the game state flag (S180). When it is during BB1 (S180: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S181. When not in BB1 (S180: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S185.

In S181, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning of SP lip (ART winning). When it is a winning of SP rip (S181: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S182. When it is not the winning of the SP lip (S181: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S183.

In S182, the main CPU 93 performs ART-related processing (S). In this process, for example, if the transfer destination after the end of BB1 is in a normal state, the ART winning is confirmed, and if the transfer destination after the end of BB1 is ART5, the winning in the additional lottery is confirmed, and if it is ART1 to ART4. For example, the winning (promotion) in the level-up lottery will be confirmed. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S190.

In S183, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning of the WSP rip (ART winning). When it is a winning of the WSP rip (S183: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S184. When it is not the winning of the WSP rip (S183: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S190.

In S184, the main CPU 93 performs ART-related processing (W). In this process, for example, if the transfer destination after the end of BB1 is in a normal state, the ART winning (start from specialization preparation) is determined, and if the transfer destination after the end of BB1 is ART5, the winning in the additional lottery is confirmed. If ART1 to ART4, winning in the level-up lottery (promotion to specialization preparation) is confirmed. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S190.

In S185, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in BB2 based on the game state flag. If it is during BB2 (S185: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S186. If it is not in BB2 (S185: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S193 shown in FIG.

In S186, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the SP lip is won. When it is a winning of SP rip (S186: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S187. When it is not the winning of the SP lip (S186: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S188.

In S187, the main CPU 93 executes a PTR stock process (S). In this process, for example, the number of stocks showing the confirmation of the PTR transition is added as one time according to the winning of BB2, and in addition to this, in addition, as a result, depending on the winning of the SP lip until the end of BB2. Each time the corresponding symbol combination is displayed, the number of stocks is added once. As a result, the stock number of PTR is added and updated. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S190.

In S188, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the WSP lip is won. When it is a winning of the WSP rip (S188: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S189. When it is not the winning of the WSP rip (S188: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S190.

In S189, the main CPU 93 executes a PTR stock process (W). In this process, for example, the number of stocks showing the confirmation of the PTR transition is added as one time according to the winning of BB2, and in addition to this, the result of the winning of the WSP rip until the end of BB2 is further added. Each time the corresponding symbol combination is displayed, the stock number is added twice. As a result, the stock number of PTR is added and updated. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S190.

In S190, the main CPU 93 subtracts the payout number according to the winning result from the BB middle payout number counter based on the display result. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S191.

In S191, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the BB medium payout number counter is less than 0. When the value of the BB medium payout number counter is less than 0 (S191: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S192. When the value of the BB medium payout number counter is not less than 0 but not less than 0 (S191: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the BB check process.

In S192, the main CPU 93 performs a BB end process. In this process, various processes required at the end of BB are executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the BB check process.

As shown in FIG. 106, in S193, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a BB prize based on the display result. When it is a BB prize (S193: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S194. When it is not a BB prize (S193: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the BB check process.

In S194, the main CPU 93 sets the BB type in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. When this processing ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S195.

In S195, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined value (351 in this embodiment) in the BB medium payout number counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S196.

In S196, the main CPU 93 performs a BB start time process. In this process, various processes required at the start of BB are executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the BB check process. In addition, in the processing of S181, S183, S186, and S88, it is determined whether or not the winning of the SP REP or the WSP REP is determined, but it may be determined whether or not the winning of these winning combinations.

<MB check processing>
Next, the MB check processing will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 107, in the MB check process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the MB based on the game state flag (S200). When it is in the MB (S200: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S201. When not in the MB (S200: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S204.

In S201, the main CPU 93 subtracts the payout amount according to the winning result from the MB payout amount counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S202.

In S202, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the mid-MB payout number counter is less than 0. When the value of the mid-MB payout number counter is less than 0 (S202: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S203. When the value of the mid-MB payout number counter is not less than 0 and is 0 or more (S202: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the MB check process.

In S203, the main CPU 93 executes processing at the end of MB. In this process, various processes required at the end of MB are executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the MB check process.

In S204, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is an MB prize based on the display result. When it is an MB winning (S204: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S205. When it is not the MB winning combination (S204: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the MB checking process.

In S205, the main CPU 93 sets the MB type in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S206.

In S206, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined value (9 or 36 in the present embodiment) in the MB payout number counter. At this time, when the MB type is MB1, 9 is set in the MB medium payout number counter, and when the MB type is MB2, 36 is set in the MB medium payout number counter. Upon completion of this processing, the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S207.

In S207, the main CPU 93 performs processing at MB start. In this process, various processes required at the start of MB are executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the MB check process.

<RT check processing>
Next, the RT check processing will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 108, in the RT check process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not RT0 is in progress based on the gaming state flag (S210). If it is during RT0 (S210: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S211. When not in RT0 (S210: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S213.

In S211, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bell spill has been established based on the display result. When the bell fold is established (S211: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S212. When the bell fold is not established (S211: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process. In addition, there is a high possibility that the bell spill will be established by the failure of the push order when the navigation effect is not performed because the push order bell is won.

In S212, the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 flag as a game state flag to ON. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

In S213, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not RT1 is in progress based on the game state flag. When it is during RT1 (S213: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S214. When not in RT1 (S213: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S218.

In S214, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the prize for the RT2 shift lip is based on the display result. When it is a winning of the RT2 shift lip (S214: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S215. When it is not the winning of the RT2 shift lip (S214: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S216. It should be noted that, during RT1, the RT2 transition lip wins because the pushing order is successful as long as it follows the pushing order of the navigation instruction at the time of winning. In other words, if no navigation instruction is given during RT1, it is difficult to win the RT2 transition lip and the possibility of winning the RT0 transition lip increases.

In S215, the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 flag as a game state flag to ON. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

In S216, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a prize for the RT0 transition rip, based on the display result. When it is a winning of the RT0 transfer rip (S216: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S217. When it is not a prize for the RT0 transfer rip (S216: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

In S217, the main CPU 93 sets the RT0 flag to ON as the game state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

In S218, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not RT2 is in progress based on the game state flag. When it is in RT2 (S218: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S219. When not in RT2 (S218: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

In S219, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bell spill has been established. When the bell-eye drops are established (S219: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S220. When the bell fold is not established (S219: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S221.

In S220, the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 flag as a game state flag to ON. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

In S221, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a prize for RT0 transition rip is won. When it is a winning of the RT0 transfer lip (S221: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S222. When it is not the winning of the RT0 transfer lip (S221: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

In S222, the main CPU 93 sets the RT0 flag as a game state flag to ON. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

<Processing of payout status>
Next, the payout state check process will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 109, in the payout state check process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a BB1 prize based on the display result (S230). When it is a BB1 winning (S230: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S231. When it is not the BB1 winning (S230: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S232.

In S231, the main CPU 93 sets normal BB (BB1) as the payout state flag. At this time, the payout state flag before setting the normal BB is set as a transfer destination when the normal BB ends without the ART winning. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S232, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a BB2 prize based on the display result. When it is a BB2 winning (S232: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S233. When it is not the BB2 winning (S232: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S234.

In S233, the main CPU 93 sets a special BB (BB2) as a payout state flag. At this time, the payout state flag before setting the special BB is reset because the ART transition is confirmed after the special BB is finished in the case of BB2 winning. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S234, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the normal state based on the payout state flag. When it is in the normal state (S234: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S235. When not in the normal state (S234: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S243 shown in FIG.

In S235, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART shift is determined in the above-described normal start process. When the ART shift is determined (S235: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S236. When the ART shift has not been decided (S235: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S238.

In S236, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of the precursor of ART. When the final game is the precursor of ART (S236: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S237. When it is not the final game of ART sign (S236: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S237, the main CPU 93 sets ART according to the lottery result and the like as the payout state flag. As a result, an ART related effect is executed from the next game as a payout state. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S238, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not CZ shift has been determined in the above-described normal start process. When the CZ shift is determined (S238: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S239. When the CZ shift has not been decided (S238: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S239, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the final game is a precursor to CZ. When it is the final game of the sign of CZ (S239: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S240. When it is not the final game of the sign of CZ (S239: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S240, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is RT2 based on the game state flag. If it is RT2 (S240: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S421. When it is not RT2 (S240: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S422.

In S241, the main CPU 93 sets EXCZ as the payout state flag. As a result, an effect related to EXCZ is executed as a payout state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S242, the main CPU 93 sets CZ as the payout state flag. As a result, an effect related to CZ is executed as a payout state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

As shown in FIG. 110, in S243, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not CZ is in progress based on the payout state flag. When it is in CZ (S243: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S244. When not in CZ (S243: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S248.

In S244, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART shift is determined in the above-described CZ start time process. When the ART shift is determined (S244: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S245. When the ART shift has not been determined (S244: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S246.

In S245, the main CPU 93 sets ART (ART2) as the payout state at the end of the CZ14Gth. As a result, when the 14th CZ is finished in a state where the ART transition is confirmed, the effect related to ART2 (ARTLv2) is executed as the payout state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S246, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of CZ. When it is the final game of CZ (S246: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S247. When it is not the final game of CZ (S246: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S247, the main CPU 93 sets a normal state as a payout state flag. As a result, when there is no ART winning and the 14th CZ is finished, the production related to the normal state is executed as the payout state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S248, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not EXCZ is in progress based on the payout state flag. When the EXCZ is being executed (S248: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S249. When not in the EXCZ (S248: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S253 shown in FIG.

In S249, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART transition is determined by the EXCZ start time process or the WSP rip, SP rep win/loss determination. For example, if it is determined that the WSP lip and the SP lip are won, the ART transfer is determined. When the ART shift is determined (S249: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S250. When the ART shift has not been decided (S249: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S251.

In S250, the main CPU 93 sets ART (ART4, specialization preparation) as the payout state flag. As a result, when the ART transition is determined according to the WSP rip or the SP rip winning in the EXCZ, ART 4 (ARTLv4) or specialization preparation effect is executed as the payout state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S251, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the final game of EXCZ. When the game is the final game of EXCZ (S251: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S252. When it is not the final game of EXCZ (S251: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S252, the main CPU 93 sets the normal state as the payout state flag. As a result, when the number of games obtained in EXCZ is exhausted without winning the WSP rip or SP rip during EXCZ, the production related to the normal state is executed as the payout state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

As shown in FIG. 111, in S253, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in ART1 to 4 (ARTLv1 to 4) based on the payout state flag. When it is during ART 1 to 4 (S253: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S254. When it is not in ART 1 to 4 (S253: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S256.

In S254, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of ART1 to ART4. When the game is the final game of ART 1 to 4 (S254: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S255. When it is not the final game of ART 1 to 4 (S254: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S255, the main CPU 93 sets the ART level after promotion/demotion (normally ART 1 to 4, specialization preparation) as the payout state flag. If you win the level-up lottery described above during ART2, you will get an ART3 internally, but as an effect, an effect demoted to ARTLv1 will be executed, and the internally set payout state flag and effect will be produced. It will be different from the ART level of the content. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S256, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART 5 is in progress based on the payout state flag. When it is in ART5 (S256: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S257. When it is not in ART5 (S256: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S259.

In S257, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of ART5. If it is the final game of ART5 (S257: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S258. When it is not the final game of ART5 (S257: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S258, the main CPU 93 sets a payout state flag based on the lottery result. For example, when the number of games of ART5 is consumed without winning the additional special stock lottery A, the production related to the normal state is executed as the payout state from the next game. Further, when the number of games of ART5 is exhausted in a state where the additional special stock lottery A wins the RUSH or the PTR, the production related to the RUSH or PTR1 to 3 is executed as the payout state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S259, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of specialization preparation. If it is the final game of specialization preparation (S259: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S260. When it is not the final game for specialization preparation (S259: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S261.

In S260, the main CPU 93 sets PTR (PTR1 to 3) as the payout state. As a result, an effect related to PTR1 to 3 is executed as a payout state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S261, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of PTR. When it is the final game of PTR (S261: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S262. When it is not the final game of PTR (S261: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S263.

In S262, the main CPU 93 sets ART5 as the payout state. As a result, an effect related to ARTLv5 is executed from the next game as a payout state. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

In S263, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the last game of RUSH. When the game is the final game of RUSH (S263: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the processing of S264. If it is not the final game of RUSH (S263: NO), the payout state check process is ended.

In S264, the main CPU 93 sets ART5 as the payout state. As a result, the production related to ARTLv5 is executed again from the next game as a payout state. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

<Sub-side navigation effect control processing by control of sub-CPU>
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the sub-side navigation effect control processing executed by the sub CPU 102 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 112, in the sub-side navigation effect control process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a navigation command has been acquired from the main CPU 93 (S300). When the navigation command is acquired (S300: YES), the sub CPU 102 moves to the processing of S301. When the navigation command is not acquired (S300: NO), the sub CPU 102 moves to the processing of S301.

In S301, the sub CPU 102 sets the navigation effect data according to the navigation command instructed by the main CPU 93. Accordingly, for example, when the payout state is ART, a navigation effect image instructing the pressing order is displayed in the display area 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. Upon completion of this processing, the sub CPU 102 moves to the processing of S304.

In S302, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo-navi push order lottery is performed using the table of FIG. 94 while the payout state is EXCZ, and the lottery is won. When the winning in the pseudo-navi pushing order lottery is won (S302: YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts to the processing of S303 as the pseudo-navi winning. When the winning in the pseudo-navi push order lottery has not been won (S302: NO), the sub CPU 102 moves to the process of S304.

In S303, the sub CPU 102 sets the navigation effect data according to the pseudo-navi winning. Thereby, for example, even when the payout state is EXCZ, which is not ART, a navigation effect image instructing the pressing order may be displayed in the display area 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. Upon completion of this processing, the sub CPU 102 moves to the processing of S304.

In S304, the sub CPU 102 sets display data according to the payout state. As a result, for example, during CZ, an effect in which the number or display color of the meter display changes when the enemy character is defeated is executed, and during EXCZ, a reverse push is suggested in accordance with the winning of the ART transition combination. An effect such as a cut-in display is executed, and in ARTs 1 to 4, an effect such that the ART level is promoted/degraded every 20G digestion is executed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the sub-side navigation effect control process.

<Various changes in game state and payout state>
Next, referring to FIGS. 113 to 115, various change modes in the gaming state and the payout state will be described.

<Relationship between the winning combination and the pattern display mode in the game state>
FIG. 113 shows the relationship between the winning combination and the symbol display mode in the game state. It should be noted that the player may perform a stop operation so as to aim at the cherry display of the left reel 3L as a guide for determining whether or not the inside of the BB is being performed. As a result, does the player display a cherry symbol corresponding to "weak cherry", "strong cherry", or "middle cherry" at the lower or middle position corresponding to the left reel 3L in the display window 4? It is possible to determine whether or not the inside of the BB is being performed depending on whether or not it is inside the BB. In addition, even if the player wins a small role other than cherry, for example, a watermelon, other symbols are stopped and displayed because the cherry slips when the left reel 3L is stopped, so that the left reel 3L is displayed. It is possible to detect that there is a possibility of winning a small winning combination that may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation for the reels 3C and 3R other than the above. A player who is familiar with this type of gaming machine often advances the game by hitting such a cherry pattern, that is, so-called DDT. When performing such a hitting method, in RT0 to RT2, if the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L at the timing when the cherry with the symbol number 9 is located in the middle row, the replay with the symbol number 11 is almost performed. Is stopped in the middle stage, and the bell 3 of the symbol number 12 is stopped and displayed in the middle stage only when the watermelon is won and the RT2 maintenance lip is won, and the symbols such as loss and bell are rarely displayed. Assuming that the game is advanced in such a manner of hitting, for example, as shown in (A) of FIG. 113, during RT0, the RT0 middle lip is pressed by any pressing order when the RT0 middle lip is won. The symbol combination (indicating REP1 as an example) corresponding to is always displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113(B), during RT0 or RT2, when the push order bell is won, there is no navigation effect, and when the stop operation is performed by hitting the DDT so as to aim at the establishment of the cherry display. If the reels are not pressed according to the correct pressing order, a symbol combination (HZR2 is shown as an example) corresponding to the bell spill is displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 113C, during RT1, when the RT2 transition rip is won, there is a push order notification by the control on the sub side, and the method of stopping the DDT is stopped and the reel is driven in accordance with the correct push order. When is pressed, a symbol combination (REP3 is shown as an example) corresponding to the RT2 transition lip is displayed.

Further, as shown in (D) of FIG. 113, during RT2, when there is a navigation effect at the time of winning the RT2 maintenance rip, when the reel is pressed down in accordance with the pressing order in which the way to hit DDT is stopped and the answer is correct. , The symbol combination corresponding to the RT2 maintenance lip (REP4 is shown as an example) is displayed. The symbol combination of this RT2 maintenance lip is a display mode in which the symbols of "lip" are aligned along a line of cross-up shown by a virtual line symmetrical to the winning determination line (cross-down). Therefore, the RT2 maintenance lip (REP4) is also referred to as a slip lip. The symbol combination corresponding to the RT2 maintenance lip shown in (D) of FIG. 113 is a symbol combination of “C_XD watermelon_02” related to a small watermelon when only the symbol row stopped and displayed on the left reel 3L is viewed (FIG. (See 25)) is the same as the symbol array constituting the above. Regarding the middle reel 3C, in order to win the watermelon at the time of winning the watermelon, it is necessary to stop and display the watermelon symbol in the middle stage, but on the symbol arrangement, depending on the timing of the stop operation, the watermelon may be dropped (Fig. 21). Therefore, as shown in (D) of FIG. 113, when the same symbol row corresponding to the RT2 maintenance lip and the watermelon is stopped and displayed on the left reel 3L, the middle reel is aimed at the watermelon that may be missed. For 3C, for example, by advancing the game by hitting so that the watermelon with the symbol number 8 is positioned at the middle position, without losing the watermelon as much as possible even if the watermelon wins. Can be awarded.

In addition, as shown in (E) of FIG. 113, for example, in RT2 during EXCZ, there may be a case where the RT2 maintenance lip and the replay relating to the red bar have been won in duplicate (WSP lip or SP lip). In this case, there is a push order notification by the control on the sub side, and the reverse display is suggested by the interruption display on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the reel is pushed down in accordance with the push order in which the way of hitting the DDT is stopped and the reverse push is performed. And, the stop control of the replay related to the red bar is prioritized over the RT2 maintenance rip, and the symbol combination (REP6 is shown as an example) corresponding to the replay related to the red bar can be displayed according to the reel stop operation timing. There is a nature. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay related to such a red bar is not displayed in the EXCZ, it is possible to shift to ART only by winning the replay related to the red bar. The symbol combination corresponding to the replay related to the red bar is also used as an opportunity to extend the number of games when displayed in PTR3.

Further, as shown in (F) of FIG. 113, when the symbol combination (white 7, white 7, white 7) corresponding to the BB1 is displayed in the BB of the BB1 in accordance with the reel stop operation timing, BB1 is executed as a game state from the next game.

Further, as shown in (G) of FIG. 113, there is a possibility that the middle tier cherry will be won in the inside of the BB, and according to how to hit the DDT at the time of this winning, the middle tier cherry is hit according to the reel stop operation timing. A symbol combination (NML4 is shown as an example) corresponding to cherry may be displayed.

That is, in the left column area corresponding to the left reel 3L in the display window 4, there may be a case where the display mode that constitutes the RT0 during the RT0 is displayed, while the display mode that constitutes the RT2 maintenance during the RT2. May be displayed, and these display modes are displayed so as to shift by one symbol. As a result, the reel stop control pattern corresponding to the left reel 3L at the time of replay winning during RT0, the display mode constituting the RT2 maintenance lip partially overlaps with the symbol group located within the four-frame range of the number of sliding pieces. It is possible to specify the display mode that constitutes the Lip during RT0 for the group. In addition, the reel stop control pattern corresponding to the left reel 3L at the time of the replay winning in RT2 is a symbol group in which the display mode configuring the lips in RT0 partially overlaps with the symbol group located within the range of four sliding symbols. On the other hand, it is possible to specify the display mode that constitutes the RT2 maintenance lip. The reel stop control pattern corresponding to the left reel 3L inside the BB is a symbol group in which the display mode that constitutes the RT0 lip and the display mode that constitutes the RT2 maintenance lip are located within the range of four sliding symbols. It is possible to specify the middle tier cherry for a group of symbols that partially overlap with.

According to such a symbol display mode, even when the player is not in the BB inside the normal state of RT2, the player first stops the left reel 3L if there is no navigation effect, and the cherry symbol is displayed in the middle stage. The pressing operation may be performed at a possible timing. In such a case, as long as the pressing order is correct, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT2 maintenance lip as shown in (D) of FIG. 113 is displayed, and falling from RT2 to RT0 can be minimized. In addition, even if the design that constitutes the RT0 transition rip is displayed due to the failure of the pushing order (replay symbol in the middle row), at the time of the replay winning, the ISM mode transition lottery is performed and the ISM that affects the transition from the normal state to the CZ is performed. Since there is a possibility that the mode has won "ultra-high accuracy", it is possible to raise expectations for the acquisition of ISM points.

<Display mode of meter in CZ>
FIG. 114 shows the display mode of the meter during CZ. As shown in FIG. 114(A), in the CZ, along with an image in which the main character and the enemy character are competing with each other, the meter display point (for example, "85" is shown) and the meter display color corresponding to the competing point are displayed. A meter M indicating (indicating “blue” as an example) is displayed. The battle point is a numerical value internally managed according to the skill point, and basically, the meter bar MB is displayed in a display color defined in advance according to the battle point (see FIG. 73(B)). The meter display point is a value displayed as a limit defined in advance according to the competition point, and the meter bar MB is displayed so as to indicate the length corresponding to this value.

As shown in FIG. 114(B), for example, when the meter display point becomes 125 and exceeds 100, the length of the meter bar MB is once reset, and the numerical value exceeding 100 from the left end of the meter M which is the origin end. A meter bar MB corresponding to the length is displayed. At this time, the meter display color that is the color of the meter bar MB changes from “blue” to “yellow”. As described above, basically, the length of the meter bar MB is reset every time the number of meter display points exceeds 100, and the meter display color changes to a color with high expectation.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 114(C), when the CZ point is added by 100 from the state of FIG. 114(A) by the fixed CZ point sorting lottery during CZ, the meter display point becomes 185 and the length of the meter bar MB is increased. Is reset once and then displayed with a length corresponding to the meter display point. On the other hand, with respect to the meter display color, if the number of internally managed battle points does not exceed 100, as shown in FIG. 114(C), the display color of “blue” does not change from “blue” to “yellow”. It is displayed as it is. As described above, the meter M displayed in the CZ may have different effect contents between the normal CZ and the confirmed CZ.

<Relationship between internal level and performance contents during ART>
FIG. 115 shows the relationship between the internal level and the effect contents during ART. As shown in FIG. 115(A), at the first transition to ART2, if there is no level-up winning (promotion) in the first ART2, ARTLv2 is demoted to ARTLv1 after 20G digestion. Then, in ARTLv1, if, for example, there is a level-up winning (promotion) by the time of 20G digestion, an effect of returning to ARTLv2 again after 20G digestion is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115(B), at the time of the first transition to ART2, if there is a level-up winning (promotion) during the first ART2, it internally shifts to ART3 after 20G digestion from ARTLv2. However, the effect display that is once demoted to ARTLv1 is displayed. In the ARTLv1 (internally ART3), even if there is no level-up winning (promotion) by the time of 20G digestion, the effect display is apparently elevated from the ARTLv1 to the ARTLv2, but internally the ART3 to the ART2. Will be moved to. As a result, in ARTL2, the ART level for presentation and the internally managed ART level again match.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115(C), when there is a level-up winning (promotion) in the first ART2 at the first transition to ART2, as in the case shown in FIG. 115(B) above, ARTLv2 After the 20G is digested, the internal display shifts to ART3, but an effect display that is temporarily demoted to ARTLv1 is displayed. Then, in the ARTLv1 (internally ART3), if there is a further level-up winning (promotion) by the time of 20G digestion, an effect display as if promoted from the ARTLv1 is apparently displayed. At this time, since the content is internally ART4, in the production, a notification production indicating that the user has actually been promoted to ARTLv4 is performed instead of the production display that is promoted to ARTLv2. Such a notification effect indicating the actual ART level is realized, for example, by displaying an enemy character corresponding to ARTLv4 in an interrupted manner at the time of the effect display at the time of promotion. As a result, the player can proceed with the game with the expectation that even if the player is demoted to the lowest level ARTLv1, it may actually be promoted to ARTLv4. The notification effect indicating the actual ART level may be performed, for example, when the ARTLv4 is promoted to the ARTLv5 (specialization preparation) according to the winning result of the level-up lottery.

As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

For example, paying attention only to the display area corresponding to the left reel 3L in the display window 4, the role of maintaining RT2 is a slip lip that is a display mode shifted by one symbol from the display mode of RT0 middle lip that maintains RT0 ( It can also be used as a role to acquire the ISM points necessary to shift from the normal state to CZ while maintaining the RT2 maintenance rip), so that the RT2 maintenance rip that does not correspond to the transition role can also be a fun feature for the player. Can be made to function, and the annoyance of the transition role can be eliminated.

In addition, regarding the RT2 maintenance rip, it is used as a part to determine the ISM point necessary for the CZ shift, and the cherry is displayed in the middle row in the display area corresponding to the left reel 3L so that the player can distinguish whether or not it is inside the BB. When attempting to perform stop display, if the BB is not inside, it is also used as a combination capable of stop display in the display mode that constitutes the RT2 maintenance lip. That is, the RT2 maintenance lip is not related to the transition of the game state, although it is used as a standard for the CZ transition and the BB winning/non-winning of the special role, so that it can be prevented from becoming too advantageous for the player. ..

In addition, in the ART during RT2, when the RT2 maintenance lip is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the red bar is performed by first performing the stop operation on the right reel 3R by the reverse push from the right end, which is different from the pushing order from the left end. Can be stopped and displayed, and the number of ART games can be added according to the winning. That is, the RT2 maintenance rip when the winning is overlapped with the replay related to the red bar, it is possible to stop and display the symbol combination in which the number of games can be added in the stop operation order in the ART, and the role for adding the number of games of ART can be added. Since it is also used as, the RT2 maintenance lip can be used for a variety of purposes as a meaningful role for the player.

Further, during the CZ, every time the meter display point corresponding to the acquired skill point reaches a prescribed point (100 in this embodiment), the meter bar MB related to the meter display can be changed from the beginning, and While the meter display color can also be changed, in the case of the confirmed CZ in which the transition to ART is confirmed even when the meter display point reaches the specified point, the meter bar MB is changed while the meter display color is changed. It can be kept unchanged and cannot be changed. As a result, even if the display color does not indicate that it is advantageous according to the acquired skill point, the expectation for the skill point can be increased.

In the normal state, if you win the red bar replay (WSP rip, SP rip) in RT2, you go directly to ART without going through CZ, and in EXCZ, the red win that overlaps with RT2 maintenance rip. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay related to the bar is not stopped and displayed in response to the reverse push, if the replay related to the red bar (WSP rep, SP rep) is won, the process shifts to ART. You can switch to ART without going through.

Also, in ART2, the contents of the effect of transitioning from ARTLv2 to ARTLv1 are displayed as if it was apparently demoted even if it was promoted internally, and after that, it was promoted even if it could not be promoted internally. As described above, since the effect contents for shifting from ARTLv1 to ARTLv2 and further from ARTLv2 to ARTLv3 are displayed, it is possible to realize so-called ART that is rich in game characteristics and eliminate monotony in ART.

In addition, the winning probability of the CZ lottery is changed by changing the CZ lottery state each time a predetermined number of games are periodically exhausted, and the state after CZ is also determined to be ART transition in advance (confirmed CZ). Whether or not to do is determined by the CZ type lottery, and the ratio between the winning probability of such CZ lottery and the winning probability of the CZ type lottery is made different every time a predetermined number of games are consumed according to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the set value while providing the difference according to the set value.

Even if the winning probability in each of the CZ lottery and the CZ type lottery is different depending on the set value, the winning probability of the CZ lottery is changed every time the predetermined number of games is periodically exhausted. Since it becomes difficult to find the relationship between the easiness to shift to and the easiness to shift to ART, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the difference due to the set value, and thus to make it difficult to guess the set value.

In addition, it is possible to carry out additional lottery using a plurality of common lottery tables (see FIG. 64) depending on different triggers in the BB gaming state and ART, so that the result of the additional lottery can be empirically obtained using the common lottery table. By making it easier to associate with, it is possible to increase the expectation and interest in the game, and it is also possible to suppress the data size of the entire table required for additional lottery.

As for the number of games that each of ART 1 to 4 continues, it is guaranteed based on the loop rate as to how many sets the set number of games (20G in the present embodiment) is set as one set. The number is guaranteed to be executed in units of sets, and even if the loop rate is small, the number of games actually continued is guaranteed in units of sets. As a result, the continuity of ART can be relaxed to some extent, and eventually the game The interest can be increased.

Further, in each of the ARTs 1 to 4, for example, by repeatedly performing promotion and demotion, the so-called number of ART games can be surely executed in set units. It is possible to guarantee the number of games in units of a set while impressing the game characteristics such as that, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, even if the final game ART lottery decides not to shift to ART in the final game (14th G) of the CZ, there are relatively few skill points (competition points) in the CZ, but in RT2, the red bar is displayed together with the RT2 maintenance lip. If the replay related to is determined as the winning combination (WSP rip, SP rep), the final game revival lottery is performed even if the replay related to the red bar does not win, and it shifts to ART by winning in this revival lottery As a result, the expectation in so-called CZ can be increased.

The present invention is not limited to the configuration of the above embodiment.

For example, the main control board may be provided with a 7-segment display so that the main CPU collects so-called role ratio information and the role ratio information can be confirmed by a monitor display. As the role ratio information, a continuous role ratio or role ratio between predetermined games, a continuous role ratio or role ratio between cumulative games, a ratio of advantageous sections, and the like may be displayed. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the winning determination line is one cross-down line, but for example, the winning determination line is five lines, and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT0 middle lip and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT2 maintenance lip are the same. Although the symbols are combined, the same symbol combination may be arranged along different winning determination lines when each display is established.

The payout state is changed mainly by winning a lottery, but it may be changed, for example, according to a winning of a winning combination. The gaming state mainly shifts in accordance with the winning of the winning combination, but may be shifted in accordance with, for example, a lottery corresponding to the winning combination or a winning of a predetermined winning combination. Further, although the processing relating to the payout state is mainly executed by the main CPU, various processing relating to the payout state may be executed by the sub CPU.

[Appendix 1]
The pachi-slot machine of Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on their respective surfaces, and game medals, coins, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "medals, etc.") are inserted, and it is detected that the player has operated the start lever. Detecting that a start switch requesting the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are pressed by the player, and requesting a stop of rotation of the corresponding reel A stop switch that outputs a signal to output each of the plurality of reels, and a stepping motor that transmits each driving force to each reel, and stepping based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. The reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor, rotates the reels, and stops the reels is provided, and when it detects that the start lever is operated, the lottery is performed based on the random number value. , "Internal winning combination") and a so-called pachi-slot machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected.

This type of conventional gaming machine has a plurality of replay times with different winning probabilities of replay (hereinafter, referred to as “RT”), and is provided on condition that a symbol combination related to a specific replay is stopped and displayed. Some RTs can be changed to another RT, and the winning probability of a specific replay is changed according to the RT. According to such a gaming machine, the easiness of transition can be made different depending on the RT during the stay, and a plurality of RTs can be easily hierarchized (for example, see JP-A-2015-77293). ).

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the type of specific replay that is easy to win according to RT, that is, the symbol combination of the transition combination changes, so that the change of the symbol combination of the transition combination is troublesome for the player in the game. It tended to be felt, and there was a difficulty that could diminish the interest in games.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that eliminates the annoyance of a transitional role and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachi-slot machine 1 described later) is
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later, a winning determination line, etc.) that displays a part of the symbols drawn on the reels,
At the start of the unit game, a winning combination determination means (for example, a main CPU 93 described below) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of re-play combinations (for example, replays described below),
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation for the reel, the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area by stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
A game state control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of shifting a plurality of game states (for example, RT described later) in which the plurality of re-game combinations are determined as the internal winning combination and having different replay probabilities. Etc.),
An effect state control means capable of shifting a plurality of effect states (for example, a main CPU 93 described later),
Equipped with
The game state control means,
In the case where a transition combination (for example, RT transition lip described later) of the plurality of combinations is determined as the internal winning combination and the symbol combination related to the transition combination is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, the internal combination A first gaming state (eg, RT0, RT1 etc. described later) with a relatively low probability that a specific re-gaming combination (eg RT2 maintenance rip described below) among the plurality of re-gaming combinations is determined as a winning combination. It is possible to shift to a second game state (for example, RT2 described later) in which the probability of the specific re-game combination being determined is higher than that,
The effect state control means,
When the specific re-game combination is determined as the internal winning combination, one of the plurality of effect states (for example, a normal state without ISM points described later) to another effect state (for example, It is possible to move to a normal state where there are ISM points described later)
The stop control means,
When a part of the plurality of symbols is not yet stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, with respect to the plurality of symbols at the time when the stop operation corresponding to the reel that is not still stopped and displayed is detected, Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the internal winning combination from a plurality of control patterns for specifying a predetermined symbol within the drawing-in range with respect to the symbol display area (for example, described later Main CPU93 etc.)
When a part of the plurality of symbols is not still stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, when the stop operation corresponding to the reel that is not yet stopped and displayed is detected, by the control pattern selection means Based on the selected control pattern, performs control to stop display the predetermined symbol specified in the retractable range at the time when the stop operation is detected, in the symbol display area,
The control pattern selection means,
When a normal re-game combination (for example, a lip during RT0 described later) of the plurality of re-game combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, a specific reel among the plurality of reels in the symbol display area With respect to a specific symbol display area corresponding to (for example, a left reel 3L described later), the symbols constituting the normal re-gaming combination are displayed for the normal re-gaming combination with respect to the symbol group located within the predetermined range. A normal re-game combination display control pattern selecting means (for example, a main CPU 93 described below) for selecting a normal re-game combination display control pattern for specifying a position (for example, a position to be a replay symbol in the middle stage described later),
When the specific re-gaming combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbols constituting the specific re-gaming combination for the specific symbol display area are assigned to the symbol group located within the retractable range. Specific re-game combination display control pattern selection means for selecting a specific re-game combination display control pattern for specifying a position where the game combination is realized (for example, a position which becomes a cross-up described later) CPU93, etc.),
Including
The normal re-game combination display control pattern is a first stop display mode (for example, a left reel shown in FIG. 113(A) described later) when the stop operation for the specific reel is detected at least at a specific timing. To specify the position that becomes the "bell 3-lip-B bar" stop display mode, etc.) in the upper, middle, and lower tiers,
The specific re-game combination display control pattern is a second stop display mode different from the first stop display mode when the stop operation for the specific reel is detected at least at a specific timing (for example, described later). 113(D), the position where the upper reel, the middle reel, and the lower reel are in the "watermelon-bell 3-lip" stop display mode) is specified.

According to such a gaming machine, when paying attention to the specific symbol display area, it is possible to shift the effect state while making the specific re-gaming role different from the normal re-gaming role the role of maintaining the second gaming state. Since it can also be used as a combination role, even a specific re-gaming role that does not correspond to a transition role in the game state can function as a role that enhances the player's interest, and the annoyance of the transition role can be eliminated. In addition, since the specific re-gaming combination does not participate in the transition of the game state, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too advantageous for the player.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The game state control means,
In the first gaming state, when the normal re-gaming combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first gaming state can be maintained,
In the second game state, when the specific re-game combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the second game state can be maintained,
The effect state control means,
When a predetermined transition condition (for example, an ART winning to be described later) is satisfied, a navigation production state (for example, ART to be described later) that can instruct the stop operation order for the plurality of reels among the plurality of production states is to be moved. Is possible,
In the navigation effect state, when a special re-gaming role (for example, a replay related to a red bar described later) is determined as the internal winning combination overlapping with the specific re-gaming role, the period of the navigation effect state is determined. Including an extendable addition means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later),
In the specific re-gaming combination display control pattern, the special re-gaming combination is determined as the internal winning combination overlapping with the specific re-gaming combination, and all of the plurality of symbols are still displayed in the symbol display area. When there is not, when the stop operation corresponding to a special reel different from the specific reel (for example, the right reel 3R described later) is detected, the symbols constituting the special re-gaming combination can be drawn in. It is possible to specify the position where the special re-gaming combination is displayed for the symbol group located within the range (for example, the position where the replay related to the red bar described later is displayed),
In the navigation effect state, when it is decided to extend the period of the navigation effect state, the stop operation order for performing the stop operation corresponding to the special reel is instructed first (for example, in the effect category described later. "Cut-in display based on "Aim cut-in", etc.)"

According to such a configuration, for example, in the navigation effect state in the second game state, when the specific re-gaming combination and the special re-gaming combination overlap, a special reel is pressed by a reverse push which is different from the normal operation according to the instruction of the stop operation order. For the special re-gaming combination to be established by first performing a stop operation, the symbols that make up the special re-gaming combination can be stopped and displayed in the special symbol display area, and the special re-gaming combination is displayed. The period of the navigation effect state can be extended according to the establishment. In other words, the specific re-gaming combination can be displayed even if the special re-gaming combination does not follow the order of the stop operation when the special re-gaming combination overlaps in the navi effect state. Since it is possible to establish the display by an unusual stop operation order as a role to extend, both of these special re-playing combination and special re-playing combination are used as a meaningful combination for the player for multiple purposes and multiple purposes. be able to.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The effect state control means,
In the second gaming state, when the specific re-game combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a point acquisition lottery (for example, ISM described below) for acquiring a predetermined point (for example, ISM point described below). A lottery means for acquiring points (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for performing an acquisition lottery)
It is possible to instruct the stop operation order for the plurality of reels in the plurality of effect states based on the predetermined points, provided that the predetermined points are a predetermined number or more (for example, ISM points are 1 or more). Transfer lottery means (eg, main CPU 93, etc., described later) for performing a transfer lottery (eg, CZ lottery, etc., described below) for shifting to a chance zone where there is a possibility of transition to a different navigation effect state (eg, ART, etc., described later) )When,
It is characterized by including.

According to such a configuration, while the specific re-playing combination is a useful combination for the player, it is only an opportunity to acquire the predetermined points necessary for the transition to the chance zone, and the navigation reproduction state is set. Since it cannot be a transition role that is directly transferred, it is possible to prevent the winning of the specific re-game role from becoming too advantageous to the player.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The control pattern selection means,
When a special combination (for example, “watermelon” as a group combination including an overlapping winning combination with BB1 described later) of the plurality of combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the specific symbol display area is concerned. In order to identify the position where the symbol forming the special combination is displayed for the symbol group located within the retractable range (for example, the position of "watermelon" on the upper stage of the left reel described later) Including a special character display control pattern selection means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for selecting the special character display control pattern,
The special combination display control pattern specifies a position in the second stop display mode when the stop operation on the specific reel is detected at least at a specific timing, and the specification in the symbol display area. Other than the reel (for example, a medium reel 3C described later) corresponding to other symbol display areas, the symbols forming the special combination are not included in the retractable range. Is specified (for example, a position at which a watermelon will be dropped, which will be described later) is specified.

According to such a gaming machine, when one of the specific re-gaming combination and the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the display mode of the specific re-gaming combination and the special combination are displayed for the specific symbol display area. Although the display mode is the same, it is not possible to determine which one is winning, but if you perform a stop operation at a predetermined timing aiming at the symbols that make up the special symbol in other symbol display areas, the special symbol will be displayed. Since the symbols can be stopped and displayed in the display mode that is established, the game can be advanced without missing a special role by performing an appropriate stop operation, and only the symbols that make up one of the roles are aimed. It is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of performing a stop operation as described above.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that eliminates the annoyance of a transitional role and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix 2]
The pachi-slot machine of Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on their respective surfaces, and game medals, coins, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "medals, etc.") are inserted, and it is detected that the player has operated the start lever. Detecting that a start switch requesting the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are pressed by the player, and requesting a stop of rotation of the corresponding reel A stop switch that outputs a signal to output each of the plurality of reels, and a stepping motor that transmits each driving force to each reel, and stepping based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. The reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor, rotates the reels, and stops the reels is provided, and when it detects that the start lever is operated, the lottery is performed based on the random number value. , "Internal winning combination") and a so-called pachi-slot machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected.

Some conventional game machines of this type do not directly display the internally stored numerical value in a so-called chance zone (chance state), but perform an effect of displaying them in a pseudo manner with a meter or a color. .. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to intuitively give a feeling of expectation for the internal numerical value (for example, see JP-A-2016-43004).

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if it is decided in advance that the chance state will shift to the advantageous state, it is easy to perform a highly expected production regardless of the internal numerical value, so it is possible to There is a risk that the sense of expectation for the production such as color change may be lost, which may reduce the interest of the game.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first effect state, if the application of the second effect state is unconfirmed, the effect mode is changed according to a predetermined effect point, while the effect effect of the second effect state is applied. Even when is fixed, the effect mode can be changed according to a predetermined effect point. That is, when it is determined in advance that the second effect state is to be given, it is assumed that the effect mode does not change without increasing the predetermined effect points, but it is not related to the predetermined effect points. Even if the presentation mode does not change from the expectation that the second effect state may be given, the expectation for giving the second effect state can be increased.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the sense of expectation for production and, in turn, enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachi-slot machine 1 described later) is
A game state in which a re-game combination (for example, a replay described later) is determined as an internal winning combination and can be changed from one game state among a plurality of game states having different re-game probabilities to another game state. Control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later),
A production state control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of shifting from one production state among a plurality of production states to another production state,
Equipped with
The effect state control means,
In a predetermined period (for example, CZ1 to 13 games described below) in a first effect state (for example, CZ described below) of the plurality of effect states, a predetermined combination is determined according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. Point accumulation means (for example, main CPU 93 described later) capable of accumulating effect points (for example, technique point described later),
After the predetermined period of time has passed in the first effect state (for example, the CZ14 game, which will be described later), the plurality of effect states from the first effect state based on the predetermined effect points accumulated by the point accumulating unit. And a production state provision determination means (for example, main CPU 93 or the like described later) capable of determining whether or not to impart a second production state (for example, ART or the like described later) of the above.
Depending on the predetermined effect points accumulated by the point accumulating means, effect mode control means capable of changing the effect mode suggesting the effect points (for example, meter display color described later) (for example, described later) Sub CPU 102, etc.),
Including
The effect state control unit is a pre-determination unit that can determine in advance that the second effect state is to be given in the predetermined period in the first effect state (for example, a main CPU 93 that performs the CZ type lottery described later). Including
Even when it is confirmed that the second effect state is given by the pre-determination means (for example, when the “determined CZ” is determined by the CZ type lottery described later, etc.) ), it is possible to change the effect mode according to the predetermined effect point.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first effect state, if the application of the second effect state is unconfirmed, the effect mode is changed according to a predetermined effect point, while the effect effect of the second effect state is applied. Even when is fixed, the effect mode can be changed according to a predetermined effect point. That is, when it is determined in advance that the second effect state is to be given, it is assumed that the effect mode does not change without increasing the predetermined effect points, but it is not related to the predetermined effect points. Even if the presentation mode does not change from the expectation that the second effect state may be given, the expectation for giving the second effect state can be increased.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The effect mode control means,
As the effect mode, every time the predetermined effect point reaches a specified point (for example, '5', '10', '15', '20', etc. as a skill point), the display color on the effect is gradually changed. It is possible to change the displayed numerical value in stages (for example, to change the meter display color to blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow, etc.) (for example, the meter display described later). Change to exceed 100 points each)
A special numerical value that can be decided to be added with a special numerical value (for example, a CZ point, which will be described later) to the displayed numerical value when it is confirmed that the second effect state is given by the pre-determining means. It has an addition determination means (a main CPU 93 etc. which carries out a fixed CZ point allocation lottery described later),
When the special numerical value addition determining unit determines to add the special numerical value, the effect mode control unit changes the display numerical value after adding the special numerical value.

According to such a configuration, when it is decided to give the second effect state, a special numerical value is added even if the display color on the effect does not change according to a predetermined effect point. Since a comparatively large display value may be displayed in terms of presentation, even when the display color and the display value show changes that do not correspond to each other, it is possible to increase the expectation for the addition of the second presentation state.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the sense of expectation for production and, in turn, enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix 3]
The pachi-slot machine of Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on their respective surfaces, and game medals, coins, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "medals, etc.") are inserted, and it is detected that the player has operated the start lever. Detecting that a start switch requesting the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are pressed by the player, and requesting a stop of rotation of the corresponding reel A stop switch that outputs a signal to output each of the plurality of reels, and a stepping motor that transmits each driving force to each reel, and stepping based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. The reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor, rotates the reels, and stops the reels is provided, and when it detects that the start lever is operated, the lottery is performed based on the random number value. , "Internal winning combination") and a so-called pachi-slot machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected.

This type of conventional gaming machine is provided with a chance zone (hereinafter referred to as "CZ") in which it is easy to determine a transition to a so-called assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), and the transition to this CZ is possible. When determined, there is one configured to perform navigation so as to transit to a specific so-called replay time (hereinafter, referred to as “RT”) for executing CZ, and execute CZ at the specific RT. According to such a gaming machine, the replay winning probability in the CZ can be designed according to the specifications of the CZ, the degree of freedom in design and development can be increased, and the enjoyment of the game in the CZ can be increased. It is possible (for example, refer to JP-A-2016-25879).

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem in that there is little variation in the production because only one CZ is activated, and the interest of the game may be diminished.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be rich in variations of production and, in turn, can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachi-slot machine 1 described later) is
A plurality of rotating reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later) on which a plurality of symbols are drawn,
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels,
A winning combination determination means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation for the reel, the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area by stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
A game state control means capable of shifting a plurality of game states having different re-gaming probabilities in which a re-gaming combination (for example, a replay described later) of the plurality of combinations is determined as the internal winning combination (for example, Main CPU 93, etc., which will be described later),
An effect state control means capable of shifting a plurality of effect states (for example, a main CPU 93 described later),
Equipped with
The game state control means,
In the case where a transition combination (for example, RT transition lip described later) of the plurality of combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, and the symbol combination related to the transition combination is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, the plurality of combinations Of the game states, the second gaming state (for example, RT2 or the like described later) having a higher replaying probability than the first gaming state (for example, RT0, RT1 or the like described later) having a relatively low regamming probability shifts to Is possible,
The effect state control means,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in a first effect state (for example, a normal effect state described later) of the plurality of effect states, a second effect state of the plurality of effect states from the first effect state (For example, CZ effect state described later),
In the first effect state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and in the second game state, a third effect different from the first effect state and the second effect state among the plurality of effect states It is characterized in that it is possible to shift to a state (for example, an EXCZ effect state described later).

According to such a gaming machine, if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the second game state even in the first effect state, a transition to a third effect state different from the second effect state is made, so that a variation is added to the effect state. It is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be maintained when a specific re-gaming combination (for example, RT2 maintenance lip described later) of the plurality of re-gaming combinations is determined as the internal winning combination,
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the specific re-gaming combination is not determined as the internal winning combination,
The effect state control means,
In the first effect state, when a predetermined effect lottery (for example, CZ lottery described later) is won as the predetermined condition, and when the first effect state shifts to the second effect state When in the second game state, it is possible to transition to the third effect state,
In the third effect state, when the specific re-game combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a fourth effect state (for example, which will be described later) that assists winning of the plurality of small winning combinations among the plurality of effect states. It is characterized in that it can be transferred to ART).

According to such a configuration, when transitioning from the first effect state to the third effect state to the fourth effect state, since it is in the second game state in which the replay probability is high, the so-called preparation period does not pass. You can move to ART.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide an amusement machine that can be rich in variations of production and, by extension, can enhance the interest of the game.

[Appendix 4]
The pachi-slot machine of Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on their respective surfaces, and game medals, coins, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "medals, etc.") are inserted, and it is detected that the player has operated the start lever. Detecting that a start switch requesting the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are pressed by the player, and requesting a stop of rotation of the corresponding reel A stop switch that outputs a signal to output each of the plurality of reels, and a stepping motor that transmits each driving force to each reel, and stepping based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. The reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor, rotates the reels, and stops the reels is provided, and when it detects that the start lever is operated, the lottery is performed based on the random number value. , "Internal winning combination") and a so-called pachi-slot machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected.

In this type of conventional gaming machine, so-called assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) rights (the number of games) are collectively managed in set units, and when a predetermined condition is met in AT, Some have a so-called add-on function that grants AT rights in set units. According to such a gaming machine, the AT right is set as a unit, and at least one set of AT games is guaranteed, so that the so-called sense of payout is enhanced and the AT right is granted. Expectation can be increased (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-200497).

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since attention is paid only to whether or not the AT right remains in a set unit, only a simple game property is exhibited, and a player tends to feel monotonous. There was a difficulty that could diminish the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides an amusement machine capable of eliminating monotonousness by realizing an ART having a rich game nature and, in turn, enhancing the enjoyment of the game. The purpose is to

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachi-slot machine 1 described later) is
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels,
At the start of the unit game, a winning combination determining means for deciding an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of small combinations (for example, a small combination described below) and a plurality of re-game combinations (for example, a replay described below) ( For example, a main CPU 93 described later),
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation for the reel, the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area by stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
A game state control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of shifting a plurality of game states (for example, RT described later) in which the plurality of re-game combinations are determined as the internal winning combination and having different replay probabilities. Etc.),
An effect state control means capable of shifting a plurality of effect states (for example, a main CPU 93, a sub CPU 102, etc. described later),
Equipped with
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a first effect state (for example, CZ described later) of the plurality of effect states, the effect state control means wins the small win from the first effect state. It is possible to give a second effect state to assist (for example, ART described later),
The second effect state can be promoted by one step each time a predetermined internal condition (for example, a level-up winning described later) is satisfied, and a predetermined number of games (for example, It is composed of a plurality of layers (for example, ARTLv1 to 4 to be described later) capable of being demoted by one step each time it digests 20G or the like to be described later,
The effect state control means, when a predetermined internal condition is satisfied in a specific hierarchy (for example, ARTLv2 described later) of the plurality of hierarchies, an effect display indicating a hierarchically demoted hierarchy. After that, when a predetermined number of games are exhausted without satisfying the predetermined internal condition, an effect control means capable of displaying the specific hierarchy as a pseudo one-step promotion (for example, described later It has a sub CPU 102 and the like).

According to such a gaming machine, even if the hierarchy is promoted internally in the specific hierarchy in the second effect state, the hierarchy is displayed as if it was apparently demoted, and thereafter it cannot be promoted internally. In particular, since the specific hierarchy is displayed as if the user returned to the promotion again, it is possible to realize a so-called ART that is rich in game characteristics and eliminate monotonousness in the ART.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
While the performance control means performs the performance display stepwise so that the specific hierarchy is demodulated one step by the provision of the predetermined internal condition and the specific hierarchy is further promoted by one step. In addition, when the predetermined internal condition is satisfied more than once, it is possible to inform that the hierarchy is actually two steps higher than the specific hierarchy in the effect display showing the specific hierarchy after the promotion to the one step. Is characterized in that

According to such a configuration, until the display returns to the specific layer by a performance display in which the specific layer is falsely demoted from the specific layer by one stage and further upgraded by the pseudo one stage by satisfying a predetermined internal condition. In addition, if the predetermined internal condition is further satisfied twice or more, it is notified that the specific hierarchy that has returned again is actually two or more layers higher than the specific hierarchy. Even if it is displayed, it is possible to proceed with the game while having the expectation that it may have been promoted to two or more levels, which also enhances the interest of the game. Also, in a hierarchy that has been demoted one level from a specific hierarchy, it is possible to make it appear that it is easier to upgrade than if it were promoted according to actual internal conditions because of the pseudo promotion, and the degree of expectation for promotion is higher. Can be raised.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating the monotonousness by realizing an ART having a rich game property and eventually enhancing the interest of the game.

[Appendix 5]
The pachi-slot machine of Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on their respective surfaces, and game medals, coins, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "medals, etc.") are inserted, and it is detected that the player has operated the start lever. Detecting that a start switch requesting the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are pressed by the player, and requesting a stop of rotation of the corresponding reel A stop switch that outputs a signal to output each of the plurality of reels, and a stepping motor that transmits each driving force to each reel, and stepping based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. The reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor, rotates the reels, and stops the reels is provided, and when it detects that the start lever is operated, the lottery is performed based on the random number value. , "Internal winning combination") and a so-called pachi-slot machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected.

Some conventional game machines of this type perform lottery such as so-called assist time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT”) based on a set value for determining a winning probability of a winning combination. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to influence the lottery in the production other than the lottery of the winning combination by the set value, and, for example, it is possible to cause a relatively large difference in the so-called winning rate (for example, , JP 2010-167197 A).

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is easy to infer the setting value from the lottery result generally corresponding to the setting value, and there is a drawback that the interest of the game may be diminished.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is possible to make it difficult to infer the set value while providing a difference according to the set value, and thus to increase the enjoyment of the game. The purpose is to provide a machine.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachi-slot machine 1 described later) is
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels,
At the start of the unit game, a winning combination determining means for deciding an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of small combinations (for example, a small combination described below) and a plurality of re-game combinations (for example, a replay described below) ( For example, a main CPU 93 described later),
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation for the reel, the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area by stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
An effect state control means capable of shifting a plurality of effect states (for example, a main CPU 93 described later),
Equipped with
The effect state control means,
In a first effect state (for example, a normal state described later) of the plurality of effect states, when there are a predetermined number or more of predetermined effect points (for example, ISM points described later), the first effect state is changed. A production state transition determining unit (e.g., a main CPU 93 that performs CZ lottery described below) that can determine to transition to a second production state (for example, CZ described later) of the plurality of production states,
Including
The production state transition determining means can change the transition possibility to the second production state every time a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games described later) are exhausted, and in the first production state, Confirming that the third effect state (for example, ART described later) is given after the end of the second effect state by a predetermined condition (for example, winning the “confirmed CZ” in the CZ type lottery described later) Is possible,
The ratio of the possibility of transitioning to the second effect state and the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition can be changed every time the predetermined number of games is exhausted according to a set value.

According to such a gaming machine, the possibility of shifting from the first effect state to the second effect state is changed every time a predetermined number of games are exhausted, and the effect state after the end of the second effect state is also changed in advance. 3 It is decided whether or not it is decided as the effect state by satisfying a predetermined condition, and the ratio between the possibility of transition to the second effect state and the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is set according to the set value. Since it can be changed each time the predetermined number of games is exhausted, it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the set value while providing a difference according to the set value.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The third effect state is an effect state in which the winning of the small winning combination can be assisted,
The possibility of transitioning to the second effect state or the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is the winning probability of each lottery (for example, the winning probability of the CZ lottery described later, the winning probability of the confirmed CZ of the CZ type lottery described later, etc.). ) Can be changed according to the set value.

According to such a configuration, the possibility of shifting to the second effect state and the possibility of a predetermined condition for confirming the shift can be changed as a winning probability of each lottery according to a set value, For example, if the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the second effect state is changed every time a predetermined number of games are exhausted, it is easy to move to the second effect state and easily given the third effect state thereafter. Since it is difficult to find the relationship between the set values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the difference due to the set values, and thus to make it difficult to guess the set values.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the set value while providing a difference according to the set value, and thus it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the game.

[Appendix 6]
The pachi-slot machine of Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on their respective surfaces, and game medals, coins, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "medals, etc.") are inserted, and it is detected that the player has operated the start lever. Detecting that a start switch requesting the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are pressed by the player, and requesting a stop of rotation of the corresponding reel A stop switch that outputs a signal to output each of the plurality of reels, and a stepping motor that transmits each driving force to each reel, and stepping based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. The reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor, rotates the reels, and stops the reels is provided, and when it detects that the start lever is operated, the lottery is performed based on the random number value. , "Internal winning combination") and a so-called pachi-slot machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected.

Some conventional gaming machines of this type perform lottery (addition lottery) for extending a period (the number of games) of a so-called assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”). According to such a gaming machine, the interest of the game can be enhanced by making the AT period indefinite (for example, see JP-A-2015-77293). In addition, in recent years, some games have been made more interesting by providing a plurality of triggers for extending the AT period.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since a plurality of lottery tables used for additional lottery are different for each of various triggers, the size of data including such a plurality of lottery tables is easily enlarged, and other stored data and processing can be performed. There was a problem that it was easy to press.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of the game while suppressing the data size.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachi-slot machine 1 described later) is
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels,
At the start of the unit game, a winning combination determination means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation for the reel, the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area by stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
An effect state control means capable of shifting a plurality of effect states (for example, a main CPU 93 described later),
Equipped with
The effect state control means,
When a predetermined grant condition is satisfied, it is possible to grant a navigation effect state (for example, ART described later) that assists in winning the internal winning combination.
In the navigation effect state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an addition means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later or the like) that can be added by a predetermined addition lottery (for example, an additional game number lottery or the like) during the period of the navigation effect state. ) Is included,
The adding means is
A plurality of lottery tables used in the predetermined additional lottery (for example, an additional game number lottery table described later) is associated with a plurality of table numbers (for example, tables 1 to 7 described later),
By designating the table number according to the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, the predetermined additional lottery is performed using the corresponding lottery table,
At least one table number of the plurality of table numbers can be designated in a plurality of different addition states in the navigation effect state (for example, normal, high-accuracy, super-high-accuracy, etc. as an additional state described later). It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, even if different internal winning combinations are determined in different addition states during the navigation effect state, the addition of the lottery can be performed using the same lottery table by designating the same table number. Since it may be performed, it is possible to empirically make it easier to associate the number of additional games to be derived as a lottery result from the same lottery table, which in turn makes it possible to increase expectations and interest in the game, and to increase the lottery results. The required data size of the entire table can also be suppressed.

In a preferred embodiment of the invention,
The effect state control means,
A special combination (for example, BB1 or the like described later) is determined as the internal winning combination by the winning combination determination means, and a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination during the winning carryover of the special combination (for example, BB inside or the like described below). When is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, it is possible to shift to a special effect state advantageous to the player (for example, a normal BB described later),
In the non-navi production state (for example, CZ or the like described later) that can shift to the navigation production state without assisting the winning of the internal winning combination, when the predetermined grant condition (for example, the ART winning or the like described later) is satisfied. It is possible to add the navigation effect state to,
In the navigation effect state, it is possible to control an additional specializing period (for example, PTR described later) for specially adding the period of the navigation effect state,
The addition means has a plurality of selection tables for randomly selecting one table number from the plurality of table numbers (for example, an additional lottery A table described later, an additional lottery B table, etc.),
In the plurality of selection tables, a first selection table (for example, an additional lottery A table, which will be described later) used in the additional state and the additional specialization period in the navigation effect state, and in the special effect state. A second selection table (for example, an additional lottery B table described later) is included,
The add-on means uses a specific table number (e.g., tables 5, 6 described later, etc.) when the first combination (e.g., strong cherry etc. described later) is won in the specialization period for addition, using the first selection table. ) Can be selected, and in the special effect state, when the second winning combination different from the first winning combination (for example, SP lip, WSP lip described later) is won, the second selection table is used to specify The table number can be selected.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of lottery tables are commonly used in the additional lottery in the navigation effect state and the special effect state, and in the additional lottery in the navigation effect state, the first selection table is used. While a specific table number can be selected at the time of winning, in the additional lottery in the special effect state, the same table number is selected using the second selection table even when winning the second combination different from the first combination. Since it is possible, it is possible not to be determined monotonically even by lottery regarding the addition in the period of the navigation effect state. In addition, since the additional lottery is performed using two types of tables such as the lottery table and the selection table, even if the probability denominator for the overall lottery probability using the two tables is set to 65536, the lottery value specified in each table is determined. Can be regulated to be relatively small by limiting the number to 256, and the data size of each table can be effectively suppressed.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest of the game while suppressing the data size.

[Appendix 7]
The pachi-slot machine of Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on their respective surfaces, and game medals, coins, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "medals, etc.") are inserted, and it is detected that the player has operated the start lever. Detecting that a start switch requesting the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are pressed by the player, and requesting a stop of rotation of the corresponding reel A stop switch that outputs a signal to output each of the plurality of reels, and a stepping motor that transmits each driving force to each reel, and stepping based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. The reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor, rotates the reels, and stops the reels is provided, and when it detects that the start lever is operated, the lottery is performed based on the random number value. , "Internal winning combination") and a so-called pachi-slot machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected.

In this type of conventional gaming machine, so-called assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") rights (the number of games) are collectively managed in set units, and AT is executed again after one set of AT is completed. There is one that decides whether or not to do by continuous lottery. According to such a gaming machine, it is difficult to predict how long the AT will last, so that it is possible to increase the expectation for the continuation of the AT (for example, see JP 2010-167197A).

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, from the viewpoint of the profit balance between the game store and the player, the probability that the continuation of the ART is decided as the result of the continuous lottery is relatively low, and the frequency of not continuing increases, so that the interest of the game is increased. However, there is a problem that the operating rate of the gaming machine is likely to decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the continuity of ART is increased in interest and, in turn, a decrease in operating rate is prevented.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachi-slot machine 1 described later) is
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels,
At the start of the unit game, a winning combination determining means for deciding an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of small combinations (for example, a small combination described below) and a plurality of re-game combinations (for example, a replay described below) ( For example, a main CPU 93 described later),
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation for the reel, the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area by stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
An effect state control means capable of shifting a plurality of effect states (for example, a main CPU 93 described later),
Equipped with
The effect state control means, in a first effect state (for example, CZ or the like described later) of the plurality of effect states, when a predetermined application condition (for example, ART winning or the like described later) is satisfied, a predetermined period of time. It is possible to provide a second effect state (for example, ART described below) that can be digested with one set (for example, 20G described below),
The effect state control means,
Continuation rate determining means capable of determining a continuation rate (for example, grade, loop rate, etc., described later) for continuing the second effect state even after the predetermined period is exceeded (for example, main ART grade lottery, described below). CPU93, etc.),
Based on the continuation rate determined by the continuation rate determination means, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the second effect state beyond the predetermined period for the second effect state (for example, loop lottery described later). Main CPU 93, etc.),
Irrespective of the determination result by the continuation determination means, a guaranteed number determination means (for example, a loop guaranteed number to be described later) that can be determined as a guaranteed number to continue a predetermined number of sets for the period of the second effect state based on the continuation rate. And a main CPU 93, etc. that performs lottery),
The guaranteed number determination means, when the second performance state is first given in the first performance state, specific information different from the continuation rate determined by the continuation rate determination means (for example, a grade described later). It is characterized in that the guaranteed number of times can be determined based on a common first time).

According to such a gaming machine, for the period in which the second effect state is continued, for example, when the second effect state is given, a predetermined period (for example, 20G) is set based on the continuation rate determined to be changeable. Even if it is not decided to continue beyond, it is possible to continue if it is decided to continue the predetermined number of sets as the guaranteed number of times based on the specific information, so there is a possibility that the second effect state will not continue. By suppressing it, the so-called ART continuity can be enhanced, which in turn can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The second effect state is an effect state in which the winning of the small winning combination is assisted, and if a predetermined promotion condition (for example, a winning by a level-up lottery described later) is satisfied, it can be promoted by one step and is predetermined. Is composed of a plurality of hierarchies (for example, ARTLv1 to 4 to be described later) that can be demoted by one step when the demotion conditions (for example, to win the specified number of games without winning by the level-up lottery to be described later) are satisfied,
A specific hierarchy (for example, ARTLv2 described later) of the plurality of hierarchies is a hierarchy lower than or equal to a hierarchy to be transferred when the second effect state is given,
The continuation determining unit and the guarantee count determining unit are capable of determining the continuation and guarantee counts respectively for the specific layer when the first transition to the specific layer.

According to such a configuration, in the second effect state, an effect that promotes/degrades a plurality of layers one step at a time is performed, and at the time of promotion, a game characteristic similar to that when a predetermined period is continued. On the other hand, even if you demote to a specific tier lower than the first migrated tier, there is a possibility that a continuation or a guaranteed number of times of continuation is given for a predetermined period of the specific tier. It is possible to effectively suppress the possibility of so-called run-through in the hierarchy.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the continuity of ART is enhanced in interest and, consequently, a decrease in operating rate is prevented.

[Appendix 8]
The pachi-slot machine of Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on their respective surfaces, and game medals, coins, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "medals, etc.") are inserted, and it is detected that the player has operated the start lever. Detecting that a start switch requesting the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels are pressed by the player, and requesting a stop of rotation of the corresponding reel A stop switch that outputs a signal to output each of the plurality of reels, and a stepping motor that transmits each driving force to each reel, and stepping based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. The reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor, rotates the reels, and stops the reels is provided, and when it detects that the start lever is operated, the lottery is performed based on the random number value. , "Internal winning combination") and a so-called pachi-slot machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected.

This type of conventional gaming machine is provided with a so-called chance zone (hereinafter referred to as "CZ"), points are given until the CZ ends, and whether or not the points exceed a predetermined value in the final game of CZ. In some cases, a so-called assist time (hereinafter, referred to as "AT") is set as a carry-over point with a numerical value of the exceeded amount when it is exceeded. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by gaining many points in the CZ (for example, see JP-A-2014-151020).

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, unless a point exceeding a predetermined value is obtained in CZ, there is a possibility that the advantage in production is low and the sense of expectation may be lost, which may reduce the interest of the game. There were difficulties.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the production state by leaving the possibility of higher advantage in production, and thus to increase the enjoyment of the game. The purpose is to provide a machine.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachi-slot machine 1 described later) is
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels,
At the start of the unit game, a winning combination determining means for deciding an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of small combinations (for example, a small combination described below) and a plurality of re-game combinations (for example, a replay described below) ( For example, a main CPU 93 described later),
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation for the reel, the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area by stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
An effect state control means capable of shifting a plurality of effect states (for example, a main CPU 93 described later),
Equipped with
The effect state control means,
In a predetermined period (for example, CZ1 to 13 games described below) in a first effect state (for example, CZ described below) of the plurality of effect states, a predetermined combination is determined according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. Point accumulation means (for example, main CPU 93 described later) capable of accumulating effect points (for example, technique point described later),
After the lapse of the predetermined period of time in the first effect state (for example, the CZ14 game, which will be described later), the second effect state among the plurality of effect states from the first effect state based on the predetermined effect points ( For example, an effect state provision determination means (for example, a main CPU 93 or the like described later) capable of determining whether or not to impart an ART or the like described later),
An effect control unit (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) that controls a predetermined effect in accordance with the result determined by the effect state assignment determination unit,
Including
Even if the effect state imparting determination means determines not to impart the second effect state after the lapse of the predetermined time period in the first effect state, a predetermined revival drawing (for example, A final game revival lottery, etc., which will be described later) is performed, and it is possible to determine that the second effect state is to be given when the final revival lottery is won.

According to such a gaming machine, even if it is determined that the second effect state is not given after the lapse of the predetermined period, the predetermined effect points accumulated in the predetermined period of the first effect state are relatively small, and the predetermined period is not satisfied. If the winning is performed by the predetermined revival lottery according to the internal winning combination after the passage, the effect that the second effect state is given is performed, and therefore the expectation for the effect state is left by leaving the possibility of increasing the advantage in the effect. Can be increased.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The point accumulating means operates from a predetermined first game (for example, CZ first game) in the first effect state to the game immediately before the final game (for example, CZ13 game) as the predetermined period. In, it is possible to accumulate the predetermined effect points,
In the final game in the first effect state (for example, the 14th CZ game, etc.) after the elapse of the predetermined period, the effect state imparting determination means is based on the predetermined effect point regardless of the internal winning combination. While it is possible to determine whether or not to provide the second effect state, it is possible to determine that the second effect state is to be applied based on a result of the predetermined revival lottery according to the internal winning combination. To do.

According to such a configuration, from the first game in the first effect state to the game immediately before the final game, predetermined effect points are accumulated according to the internal winning combination, while the final game in the first effect state. Then, it is determined whether or not the second effect state is given using the predetermined effect points accumulated regardless of the winning combination, and even if it is decided not to give the second effect state, the internal winning combination in the final game is decided. Depending on the above, there is a possibility that the second effect state is given by a predetermined revival drawing. As a result, the internal winning combination that is repeatedly determined from the first game to the final game in the first production state can be effectively used for the lottery in the production, and the production corresponding to the internal winning combination is thoroughly performed from the first game to the final game. Can be performed.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the sense of expectation for the rendering state by leaving the possibility of higher advantage in the rendering, and thus enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Other]
As a game machine, for example, a pachi-slot machine as disclosed in JP-A-2014-151020 is known. However, since this pachi-slot machine does not have the configuration and function as the gaming machine like the present invention, it has not been possible to improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

1 Pachi-slot machine 3L, 3C, 3R Reel 4 Display window 11 Liquid crystal display 16 Start lever 17L, 17C, 17R Stop button 41 Main control board 42 Sub-control board 64 Start switch 65 Stop switch board 76 ROM cartridge board 93 Main CPU
94 Main ROM
95 Main RAM
102 sub CPU
103 sub RAM

Claims (3)

Multiple symbols are drawn, multiple reels that rotate for each unit game,
A symbol display area for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels,
When starting the unit game, a winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation for the reel, the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area by stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation Stop control means for stopping and displaying a part of
A production state control means capable of shifting a plurality of production states,
Equipped with
The effect state control means,
When a predetermined grant condition is satisfied, it is possible to add a navigation effect state that assists the winning of the internal winning combination.
In the navigation effect state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, including an addition means capable of adding the period of the navigation effect state by a predetermined addition lottery,
The adding means is
Having a plurality of lottery tables used in the predetermined additional lottery in association with a plurality of table numbers,
By designating the table number according to the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, the predetermined additional lottery is performed using the corresponding lottery table,
At least one table number of the plurality of table numbers, it is possible to specify in a plurality of different addition state in the navigation effect state,
The addition means has a plurality of selection tables for randomly selecting one table number from the plurality of table numbers,
The plurality of selection tables include at least a first selection table and a second selection table,
The addition means is capable of selecting a specific table number using the first selection table when the first winning combination is won, and the second selection when the second winning combination different from the first winning combination is won. Ri selectable der the specific table number using the table,
A game machine characterized in that the first selection table is defined to be used by multiplying a defined lottery value in accordance with the plurality of additional states . Multiple symbols are drawn, multiple reels that rotate for each unit game,
A symbol display area for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels,
When starting the unit game, a winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation for the reel, the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area by stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation Stop control means for stopping and displaying a part of
A production state control means capable of shifting a plurality of production states,
Equipped with
The effect state control means,
When a predetermined grant condition is satisfied, it is possible to add a navigation effect state that assists the winning of the internal winning combination.
In the navigation effect state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, including an addition means capable of adding the period of the navigation effect state by a predetermined addition lottery,
The adding means is
Having a plurality of lottery tables used in the predetermined additional lottery in association with a plurality of table numbers,
By designating the table number according to the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, the predetermined additional lottery is performed using the corresponding lottery table,
At least one table number of the plurality of table numbers, it is possible to specify in a plurality of different addition state in the navigation effect state,
It has a first selection table for randomly selecting one table number from the plurality of table numbers,
The effect state control means,
Advantageous for the player when a special combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the winning combination determination means, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area while the winning combination of the special combination is carried over. It is possible to shift to a special production state,
In the non-navi production state in which it is possible to shift to the navigation production state without assisting the winning of the internal winning combination, it is possible to give the navigation production state when the predetermined given condition is satisfied,
It is possible to control the additional specialization period for specially adding the period of the navigation production state in the navigation production state,
The addition means is capable of selecting a specific table number from the plurality of table numbers based on the first selection table in the addition specialization period, and the addition of the plurality of table numbers in the special effect state. Ri can be selected der a specific table number,
A game machine characterized in that the first selection table is defined to be used by multiplying a defined lottery value in accordance with the plurality of additional states . The first selection table is
When the added-on state is the first added-on state, the first lottery value corresponding to when the predetermined combination is won is defined,
When the additional state is a second additional state different from the first additional state, it is specified that the first lottery value is doubled when the predetermined combination is won, and the predetermined combination is used. It defines the second lottery value corresponding to the winning of a specific combination different from
When the additional state is a third additional state that is different from the first additional state and the second additional state, it is specified that the second lottery value is doubled and used when the specific combination is won. and gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that are.

Images